NEC ASPILA EX Feature Manual Download Page 284 | Manualshive

Page: 284 / 1098

background image

Night Service

270

Features

Aspila EX Software Manual

Related Features

Central Office Calls, Answering and Placing/Ring Groups

There are separate Access Map and Ring Group programming entries for each Night Service
mode (Day 1, Night 1, Midnight 1, Rest 1, Day 2, Night 2, Midnight 2, Rest 2). Also, “Uni-

versal Answer” allows an extension user to pick up a UNA call.

Paging, External

With Universal Night Answer, outside calls can ring External Paging Zones.

Programmable Function Keys

Function keys simplify activating Night Service.

Voice Response System (VRS)

Using the service code defined in Program 11-15-09, a caller listening to the VRS message
can have the ability to transfer their call and have it ring the external page. The code the caller
would dial is defined in Program 25-06-02.

Operation

To activate Night Service by dialing codes:

1.

At system phone, press idle CALL key.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset.

2.

Dial 818.

3.

Dial Night Service code:

    1 Day 1 mode
    2 Night 1 mode
    3 Midnight 1 mode

    4 Rest 1 mode
    5 Day 2 mode
    6 Night 2 mode

7 Midnight 2 mode
8 Rest 2 mode

4.

Press SPK to hang up.

To activate Night Service by using programmable keys:

1.

Press Night Service key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 09) + Mode code number (below).

1 Day 1 mode

    2 Night 1 mode
    3 Midnight 1 mode
    4 Rest 1 mode

    5 Day 2 mode
    6 Night 2 mode
    7 Midnight 2 mode

8 Rest 2 mode

To transfer a call to the Universal Answer External Page zones:

1.

Place the CO call on hold and dial the Transfer to Trunk Ring Group code.

You will hear a confirmation tone.

2.

Hang up.

The call rings over the External Paging, enabling anyone to answer the call.

«
...
282
283
284
285
286
...
»

Summary of Contents for ASPILA EX

Page 1: ...Features Manual 00 01 1 Features 2 Programming ...

Page 2: ...spect to any of the equipment covered This manual is subject to change without notice and NEC Infrontia has no obligation to provide any updates or corrections to this manual Further NEC Infrontia also reserves the right without prior notice to make changes in equipment design or components as it deems appropriate No representation is made that this manual is complete or accurate in all respects a...

Page 3: ...reviated Dial 97 Call Forwarding with Follow Me 101 Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Override 103 Call Pickup Group 104 Call Redirect 105 Call Timer 107 Call Waiting Camp On 108 Callback 110 Caller ID 112 Central Office Calls Answering 116 Central Office Calls Placing 120 Class of Service 124 Conference 136 Conference Voice Call Privacy Release 140 Continued Dialing 142 Data Communications 144 Depar...

Page 4: ...dsfree and Monitor 207 Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing 209 Headset Operation 211 Hold 213 Hotel Motel 217 Hotline 219 Hotline External 221 InDepth 222 Intercom 224 Intercom Abandoned Call Display 227 ISDN Compatibility 228 Labelmaker 230 Last Number Redial 231 Line Preference 233 Long Conversation Cutoff 236 Loop Keys 238 Meet Me Conference 241 Meet Me Paging 245 Meet Me Paging Transf...

Page 5: ...tary Call Pickup 319 Selectable Display Messaging 321 Selectable Ring Tones 324 Serial Call 326 Single Line Telephones Analogue Sets 327 Single Line Telephones Digital 329 Soft Keys 331 Station Message Detail Recording 332 Tandem Trunking Unsupervised Conference 339 Tie Lines 342 Time and Date 347 Toll Restriction 349 Toll Restriction Dial Block 353 Toll Restriction Override 356 Traffic Management...

Page 6: ...p 450 10 17 H 323 Gatekeeper Setup 452 10 18 H 323 Alias Address Setup 454 10 19 VoIPU DSP Resource Selection 456 10 20 LAN Setup for External Equipment 458 10 21 NTCPU Hardware Setup 460 10 22 Setting the Wake On LAN for APSU 462 10 23 H 323 System Interconnection 464 10 24 Daylight Savings Setup 466 10 25 H 323 Gateway Prefix Setup 468 10 26 IP System Operation Setup 469 10 27 IP System ID 470 P...

Page 7: ...ng Bins 530 13 03 Abbreviated Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions 532 13 04 Abbreviated Dialing Number and Name 534 13 05 Abbreviated Dialing Trunk Group 536 13 06 538 Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup 539 14 01 Basic Trunk Data Setup 539 14 02 Analogue Trunk Data Setup 543 14 04 Behind PBX Setup 546 14 05 Trunk Group 548 14 06 Trunk Group Routing 550 14 07 Trunk Access Map Setup 552 14 08 Music on...

Page 8: ...Level 615 20 08 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service 618 20 09 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service 621 20 10 Class of Service Options Answer Service 623 20 11 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service 625 20 12 Class of Service Options Charging Cost Service 628 20 13 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service 630 20 14 Class of Service Options for DISA E M 634 20 15 R...

Page 9: ...mal Incoming Ring Mode 696 22 07 DIL Assignment 698 22 08 DIL IRG No Answer Destination 700 22 09 DID Basic Data Setup 702 22 10 DID Translation Table Setup 704 22 11 DID Translation Number Conversion 706 22 12 DID Intercept Ring Group 709 22 13 DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment 711 22 14 VRS Waiting Delayed Message for IRG 713 22 15 VRS Waiting Message for Department Group 715 Progr...

Page 10: ...ice 763 26 02 Dial Analysis Table for ARS 765 26 03 ARS Dial Treatments 767 26 04 ARS Class of Service 769 Program 30 DSS DLS Console Setup 770 30 01 DSS Console Operating Mode 770 30 02 DSS Console Extension Assignment 772 30 03 DSS Console Key Assignment 774 30 04 Alternate DSS Console Extension Assignment 780 30 05 DSS Console Lamp Table 781 Program 31 Trunk Basic Setup 784 31 01 System Options...

Page 11: ...ent Groups 838 35 05 Account Code Setup 839 35 06 Verified Account Code Table 841 Program 40 Voice Mail Setup 843 40 01 Voice Mail Basic Setup 843 40 02 Mailbox Setup 845 40 03 Message Recording Setup 847 40 04 Live Recording Setup 849 40 05 Call Information Setup 851 40 06 Voice Mail Automated Attendant Data Setup 853 40 07 Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Voice Mail 855 40 08 Voice Prompt La...

Page 12: ...odes 905 42 05 Hotel Room Status Printer 907 Program 44 ARS F Route Setup 909 44 01 System Options for ARS F Route 909 44 02 Dial Analysis Table for ARS F Route Access 910 44 03 Dial Analyze Extension Table 912 44 04 ARS F Route Selection for Time Schedule 914 44 05 ARS F Route Table 915 44 06 Additional Dial Table 917 44 07 Gain Table for ARS F Route Access 918 44 08 Time Schedule for ARS F Route...

Page 13: ... Setup 974 82 07 CODEC Filter Setup for Analogue Station Ports 976 Program 83 Basic Hardware Setup for Traveler 978 83 01 CS Data Setup 978 83 02 Air Clock Data Setup 979 83 03 Frame Offset Value 980 83 04 Frequency Number Between PS and PS 981 83 05 CS Area Information 982 83 06 CS Area Number Information 983 83 07 CS DL2 Information Setup 984 83 08 CS Additional ID Mode 985 83 09 CS Additional I...

Page 14: ...e 1036 90 10 System Alarm Setup 1038 90 11 System Alarm Report 1041 90 12 System Alarm Output 1043 90 13 System Information Output 1045 90 16 Main Software Information 1047 90 17 Firmware Information 1048 90 18 Password Initialization for Japanese Character Telephone 1050 90 19 Dial Block Release 1051 90 20 Traffic Report Data Setup 1052 90 21 Traffic Report Output 1054 90 22 NGT Terminal Version ...

Page 15: ...Aspila EX Software Manual Features 1 Features ...

Page 16: ...2 Features Aspila EX Software Manual ...

Page 17: ...mize a feature use Section 2 to enter the change into the system Related Features presents the feature interaction Operation consists of instructions on how to use each feature Read These Notes Simplifying System Phone Operation with One Touch Keys A system phone user can access many features through Service Codes e g Service Code 841 leaves a Message Waiting for a co worker To streamline the oper...

Page 18: ...or extension and assigns the required extension or trunk ports to the slot The sys tem will use the next available port number it will not reserve any ports The PRI PCB assigns the first 32 consecutive trunk ports Port Calculation for Extensions With the 8 16ESIU or 8SLIU PCBs the system detects the type of PCB trunk or extension and assigns the required number of extension ports for the PCB to th...

Page 19: ...s 5 Charts and Illustrations Table 1 Abbreviated and Post Dialing Service Codes Single Digit Post Dialing Codes For this feature When you are 1 Handsfree Answerback Forced intercom Ringing Changing the signaling mode of your outgoing Intercom call 2 0 Not used ...

Page 20: ...tination for Auto matic Trunk Transfer Transfer 751 Making a Combined Page Paging 888 0 Canceling Call Forwarding Call Forwarding 16 888 1 Type 2 4 Activating Personal Answering Machine Emulation Voice Mail Personal Answering Machine Emulation 16 888 2 Destination Type 2 4 Activating Call Forwarding when Busy Not Answered Call Forwarding 16 888 3 Destination Type 2 4 Activating Call Forward Follow...

Page 21: ...m data Maintenance Hookflash 891 Enter Account Code Hookflash Entering an Account Code at an SLT Account Codes 872 Using Universal Answer Code to pick up a call ringing over the paging system Central Office Calls Answering Hookflash 826 extension hookflash twice Activating Conference from a Single Line set Conference 813 bin Dialing a Common Abbreviated Dialing number Abbreviated Dialing 27 806 Fl...

Page 22: ...atic Transfer Setup for each extension group Transfer 703 Group number 01 64 Cancelling Automatic Transfer Setup Transfer 704 Group number 01 64 mode extension Setting the destination for Auto matic Transfer Setup for each extension group Transfer 705 Group number 01 64 Setting Delayed Transfer for each extension group Transfer 706 Group number 01 64 Cancelling Delayed Transfer Transfer 707 Group ...

Page 23: ... Hotel Motel Do Not Disturb 729 Enabling DND for another room telephone Hotel Motel Do Not Disturb 730 Canceling DND at another room telephone Hotel Motel Wake Up Call 731 Setting up a Wake Up call for your own room telephone Hotel Motel Wake Up Call 732 Canceling a Wake Up Call for your own room telephone Hotel Motel Wake Up Call 733 Setting a Wake Up Call for another guest s room telephone Hotel...

Page 24: ...ng 754 Enabling Conversation Record at an SLT set Voice Mail 755 Logging out of or in to an ACD Group from an SLT Automatic Call Distribution ACD 756 Activating Work Time from an SLT Automatic Call Distribution ACD 17 757 Canceling Work Time from an SLT Automatic Call Distribution ACD 17 758 Activating Rest Mode from an SLT Automatic Call Distribution ACD 13 759 Canceling Rest Mode from an SLT Aut...

Page 25: ...y for a second call with DID DISA DIL Central Office Calls Answering 725 Live Monitoring Voice Mail 771 Charge Cost Display by the supervisor Station Message Detail Recording 774 Entry Credit for Toll Restriction Toll Restriction 780 Change to STG All Ring Ring Groups 800 extension enter name HOLD Programming extension names Name Storing 55 801 zone 1 9 or 01 64 801 zone 0 or 00 Making an Internal...

Page 26: ...ng Night 2 Mode Activating Midnight 2 Mode Activating Rest 2 Mode Night Service 09 1 09 2 09 3 09 4 09 5 09 6 09 7 09 8 820 1 ICM or 2 trk tone 1 8 Changing your extension s incoming ring tones Selectable Ring Tones 821 Enabling Handsfree Answerback for incoming Intercom calls Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing 822 Calling off premise with a Door Box Call Forwarding Off Premise Door Box ...

Page 27: ...ing 15 848 Setting Call Forward Immediate Call Forwarding 10 847 0 Cancel 1 Trk calls 2 Paging ICM Call Forward and transfers 3 All calls 4 Call Forwards Activating Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb 849 Placing a call on Exclusive Hold at a SLT set Hold 850 Camping On to an extension when calling into the system through the VRS Voice Response Sys tem VRS 35 851 key code Changing the function of a pro ...

Page 28: ...e group called Meet Me Conference Meet Me Paging 23 or 32 864 zone paged 0 9 or 00 64 Joining a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Page if your extension is not in the group paged Meet Me Paging 23 or 32 865 zone 0 8 Joining a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Page on an External Paging Zone Meet Me Conference Meet Me Paging 23 or 32 866 Using trunk access via Networking Networking 868 pickup group 1 9 or ...

Page 29: ...on Hold 882 Routing ANI DNIS to the VRS It can also be used when transfer ring to VRS Transfer Voice Reponse Service VRS 883 Enabling the data communication auto answer mode Data Communications 884 Accessing the VRS Voice Reponse Service VRS 885 Clearing the number saved by Save Number Redial Save Number Redial 890 Using Voice Over after calling a busy extension Voice Over 48 894 Splitting between...

Page 30: ...891 Enter account code Hookflash Entering an Account Code at an SLT Alarm 827 1 or 2 time or 827 1 or 2 9999 to cancel Checking setting or canceling an alarm Automatic Call Distribution ACD 839 Logging out of or in to an ACD Group 10 755 Logging out of or in to an ACD Group from an SLT 756 Activating Work Time from an SLT 17 757 Canceling Work Time from an SLT 17 758 Activating Rest Mode from an S...

Page 31: ...37 Call Forwarding with Follow Me 888 3 Destination Type 2 4 Activating Call Forward Follow Me at the destination extension 16 Call Waiting Camp On 894 Splitting switching between calls on an SLT Callback Camp On Trunk Queuing 870 Canceling a Callback request 899 Testing Callback operation for SLT Central Office Calls Answering Hold 872 Using Universal Answer to pick up a call ringing over the pag...

Page 32: ...Door Box is forwarded off premise Flash 806 Flashing a trunk from an SLT Forced Trunk Disconnect 724 after 805 001 200 busy Disconnecting a call in progress on a trunk Group Call Pickup 867 Picking up a call ringing an extension in your own pickup group except Ring Group calls 24 868 pickup group 1 9 or 01 64 Answering a call ringing a phone in another pickup group 26 group 869 Answering a call ri...

Page 33: ...m telephone Hotel Motel Wake Up Call 732 Canceling a Wake Up Call for your own room telephone Hotel Motel Wake Up Call 733 Setting a Wake Up Call for another guest s room telephone Hotel Motel Wake Up Call 734 Canceling a wake Up Call for another guest s room telephone Hotel Motel Room to Room Call Restriction 735 Enabling Room to Room Call Restriction for a guest s room telephone Hotel Motel Room...

Page 34: ...Paging Zone if your extension is in the group called 23 Meet Me Paging or 32 Meet Me Conference 864 zone paged 0 9 or 00 64 Joining a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Page if your extension is not in the group paged 865 zone 0 8 Joining a Meet Me conference or Meet Me Page on an External Paging Zone Message Waiting 841 Answering a Message Waiting request 38 871 ext Canceling Messages Waiting you have...

Page 35: ...0 Paging External 803 zone 1 8 803 zone 0 Making an external zone page Making an external All Call page 19 zone 20 Paging External Night Service 880 relay number 0 8 Activating the general purpose relay 51 Paging Internal 801 zone 1 9 or 01 64 801 zone 0 or 00 Making an Internal Zone Page Making an internal All Call Page 21 zone or 22 Park 831 orbit 01 64 Parking a call in a system Park orbit 01 6...

Page 36: ...ording 721 Print the SMDR Extension Accumulated printout 722 Print the SMDR Group Accumulated printout 723 Print the SMDR Account Code Accumu lated printout 771 Charge Cost Display Tandem Trunking Unsupervised Conference 8 Setting up an Unsupervised Conference Time and Date 828 hour minutes Setting the system Time Toll Restriction Dial Block 700 code 0 Using Dial Block 701 code 0 A supervisor usin...

Page 37: ...layed Transfer 707 Group number 01 64 Setting up DND for each extension group 708 Group number 01 64 Cancelling DND for each extension group 882 Transferring a call to the VRS This can also be used for routing ANI DNIS to the VRS Trunk Group Routing or Automatic Route Selection 9 Placing a call using Trunk Group Routing or Automatic Route Selection 02 Voice Mail 888 1 Type 2 4 Activating Personal ...

Page 38: ... to erase 5 to listen or 7 to record Recording listening to or erasing the General Message 716 3 to erase 5 to listen or 7 to record Recording listening to or erasing a VRS Message 850 Camping On to an extension when calling into the system through the VRS 882 Transferring a call to the VRS This can also be used for routing ANI DNIS to the VRS 884 Accessing the VRS Volume Control 829 Checking or c...

Page 39: ...or 0 to cancel Basic Operation Logging in or out of an ACD Group On red when logged in Off when logged out 839 Code 11 Operation Press key Turning ACD Call Recording on or off On red when recording Off when not recording 760 Code 12 Operation Press key Emergency Call Placing or receiving an Emer gency Call On while calling your supervisor or after being answered by your supervisor Flashing fast at...

Page 40: ...xtension Slow Flash red when ringing On red when busy Call Forwarding Both Ring Code 14 Operation Press key Dest Extension Call Forwarding Both Ring to extension Slowly flashes red 888 7 Call Forwarding Busy Code 11 Operation Press key Dest Extension Call Forwarding Busy to extension or Voice Mail Slowly flashes red 888 2 Call Forwarding Busy No Answer Code 13 Operation Press key Dest Extension Ca...

Page 41: ...trunk Press key Leaving a Call back request at a busy extension Camping On to a busy extension or Queuing for a busy trunk On red when activated Call Redirect Code 49 extension or voice mail Operation Press key Redirect a ringing call to the predefined destination On red when acti vated Central Office Calls Code 01 Trunk num ber 001 200 Operation Press key Pressing a line key to place or answer a ...

Page 42: ... None 867 Code 25 Operation CALL Press key Answering a call ringing a phone in another Pickup Group if you don t know the group number None 869 Code 26 Pickup Group 1 9 or 01 64 Operation CALL Press key Pkup Group Answering a call ringing a phone in a specific Pickup Group None 868 Handset Cutoff Code 40 Operation Press key Cutting off the handset trans mission while on a call On when feature acti...

Page 43: ... dial number None Message Waiting Code 38 Operation Leave mes sage Call ext Press key OR Answer message Press key Answering Leaving a Message Waiting None 841 Microphone Cutoff Code 02 Operation Set up call Press key Using Microphone Cutoff On red when activated Multiple Directory Numbers Code 03 ext or dept group Operation Press key Placing or answering a call to your virtual phantom extension Sl...

Page 44: ...redial Reverse Voice Over Code 47 dest ext Operation Press and hold key Initiating Reverse Voice Over Full BLF red Room Monitor Code 39 Operation Press key at destination source ext Activating Room Monitor Dest Fast Flash red Source Hold Flash red Save Number Dialed Code 30 Operation Save Place call Press key Redial Line or CALL Press key Saving redialing or checking a saved number None Secretary ...

Page 45: ...y device type code requested data depends on device selected Setting up Call Forwarding Off Premise Selectable Display Messaging VRS Park and Page and VRS Personal Greeting Flashes red 713 Voice Mail Code 67 extension or Message Center number Operation Press key Calling Voice Mail or leaving a message Flashes green on your key for your messages or flashes red for the Message Center 717 Code 68 cod...

Page 46: ...nd Music Turning BGM on or off On red when activated 825 Code 05 Operation Press key Headset Operation Enabling or disabling Headset Operation On red when activated 834 Code 06 Operation Estab lish call Hold Ext Press key Transfer Transferring a call None Code 07 Operation Set up call Press key set up call to add Press key twice Conference Setting up a conference or a Meet Me Conference On red dur...

Page 47: ...ding to Device Off Premise Selectable Display Messaging Voice Response System VRS Park and Page Voice Response System VRS Personal Greeting Setting up Call Forwarding Off Premise Selectable Display Messaging VRS Park and Page and VRS Personal Greeting Flashes red 713 Code 19 zone 1 8 Operation Press key Paging External Broadcasting to an External Paging Zone On red when activated 803 zone Code 20 ...

Page 48: ...red Common Abbreviated Dialing number None 813 bin Code 28 Operation Press key bin Line or CALL key Dialing a stored Group Abbreviated Dialing number None 814 bin Code 29 Operation Place call Press key Repeat Redial Activating repeat redial while on a call Fast Flash while system waits to redial Code 30 Operation Save Place call Press key Redial Line or CALL Press key Save Number Dialed Saving red...

Page 49: ... Department Step Calling Step Calling through a Department Group for an idle member None 808 Code 37 Operation Call extension Press key Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Override Overriding an extension s Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb On red when activated 807 Code 38 Operation Leave message Call ext Press key OR Answer message Press key Message Waiting Answering Leaving a Message Waiting None 84...

Page 50: ...hen removed Off when installed 750 Code 47 dest ext Operation Press and hold key Reverse Voice Over Initiating Reverse Voice Over Full BLF red Code 48 Operation Hear Off Hook Signaling tones Press key Voice Over Initiating or responding to Voice Over On red when responding Hold Flash red when listening 890 Code 49 ext or voice mail number Operation Press key Call Redirect Redirecting an incoming c...

Page 51: ...sing Voice Mail Record Slow Flash red when active Code 01 Trunk number 001 200 Operation Press key Central Office Calls Pressing a line key to place or answer a trunk call where trunks are 001 200 On green when seized on red when in use by other party Slow Flash green when ringing Hold flash when on Hold 805 Code 02 Trk group 1 9 or 001 200 Operation Press key Trunk Groups Using a trunk group key ...

Page 52: ...g or answering a trunk call Flash red when ringing On green when in use Flash green when on hold Code 06 Net work number 1 50 Operation Press key Networking Accessing a networked trunk None Code 10 Operation Press key to log in Press key 1 to log out or 0 to cancel Automatic Call Distribution ACD Basic Operation Logging in or out of an ACD Group On red when logged in Off when logged out 839 Table ...

Page 53: ...s out of service Code 15 Operation Call busy ACD agent Press key Terminal Monitor Monitoring an ACD Agent s conversation On red while moni toring Off when not monitoring Code 16 Operation Press key to put agent on hold Press key again 1 to hang up agent or 0 to bring agent back into call Supervisor Split Switching splitting between an ACD Agent and their out side caller after answering an emergenc...

Page 54: ...Charts and Illustrations 40 Features Aspila EX Software Manual ...

Page 55: ...runk Ports Total Analogue Trunks BRI Trunk Ports PRI Trunk Ports E M Analogue Trunk Ports DID Analogue Trunk Ports 200 128 200 100 BRI circuits 192 6 PRI circuits 64 128 BRIU Logical Ports T Bus 1 200 S Bus 1 256 COIU Physical Ports Logical Ports 01 08 0 200 DIOPU Physical Ports Logical Ports 01 08 LD Trunk 0 200 OPX 0 25 PRIU Logical Ports T Bus 1 200 S Bus 1 256 TLIU Physical Ports Logical Ports...

Page 56: ...IU Physical Ports Logical Ports 2DCI Adapter PGD for Tone Ringer PGD for Doorbox PGD for Analogue I F PGD for ACI 01 16 1 32 1 8 1 8 1 96 1 96 SLIU Physical Ports Logical Ports 01 16 0 512 Telephone Extension Number Range Up to 8 digits Virtual Extension Ports 256 Virtual Extension Port Numbers 001 256 Virtual Extension Number Range Undefined Operator Access Number 0 Operator Extension 1 DSS Conso...

Page 57: ...mbers 193 256 APA APR CTA or CTA Modules 128 Module Extension Number Range Up to 8 digits Department and Pickup Groups Department Extension Group Numbers 1 64 Department Extension Group Number Range Up to 8 digits Call Pickup Group Numbers 1 64 Hotline Internal Hotline 512 External Hotline 512 Paging and Park Internal Page Group Numbers 0 1 9 or 01 64 External Page Group Numbers 0 1 8 External Spe...

Page 58: ... 65535 H 245 Ports 0 65535 DSP Resources 01 32 H 323 Alias Addresses 1 6 Passwords User Password for setting Toll Restriction Override and Changing Class of Service using a service code 0000 Programming Passwords Level 2 IN 12345678 Level 3 SA 0000 Level 4 SB 9999 Programming Password Users 8 Footnotes 1 Count toward total number of allowed hardware ports 512 Extension numbers can be from one to e...

Page 59: ...Charts and Illustrations Aspila EX Software Manual Features 45 Figure 1 SUPER DISPLAY TELEPHONE ...

Page 60: ...Charts and Illustrations 46 Features Aspila EX Software Manual Figure 2 MULTIBUTTON TELEPHONE ...

Page 61: ...Charts and Illustrations Aspila EX Software Manual Features 47 Figure 3 110 BUTTON DSS CONSOLE ...

Page 62: ...Charts and Illustrations 48 Features Aspila EX Software Manual Figure 4 24 BUTTON DSS CONSOLE ...

Page 63: ...Charts and Illustrations Aspila EX Software Manual Features 49 Figure 5 Digital Two Button Telephone ...

Page 64: ... user with a DSS Console to chain to an Abbreviated Dialing number stored under a DSS Console key The stored number dials out chains to the initial call This can for example simplify dialing when calling a company with an Automated Attendant You can program the bin for the company number under one DSS Console key e g 200 and the client s extension number under the other e g 201 The DSS Console use...

Page 65: ...Assign a function key for Common Abbreviated Dialing code 813 or Group Abbreviated Dialing code 814 You can program the key as either a general Abbreviated Dialing key or you can choose to store a bin number with the function key This key would then always dial the associated bin number If storing a bin number along with the code do not store 0 00 or 000 To bypass entering a bin number press HOLD ...

Page 66: ...andles Dial Tone Detection One Touch Calling An extension can have a One Touch Key for Abbreviated Dialing operation PBX Compatibility If you enter a PBX trunk access code in an Abbreviated Dialing bin the system automatically inserts a pause after the bin Programmable Function Keys Function keys simplify Abbreviated Dialing operation Single Line Telephones Single line telephones can only dial Com...

Page 67: ...ystem may optionally select a specific Trunk Group for the call If you have a DSS Console you may be able to press a DSS Console key to chain to a stored number When entering names in the procedures below refer to this chart Names can be up to 12 digits long Use this keypad digit When you want to 1 Enter characters 1 _ 2 Enter characters A C a c 2 3 Enter characters D F a f 3 4 Enter characters G ...

Page 68: ... you preselect Trunk Group Routing selects the trunk for the call If you have a DSS Console you may be able to press a DSS Console key to chain to a stored number To check your stored Abbreviated Dialing numbers display phone only 1 Press CHECK 2 For Common Abbreviated Dialing press DIAL Dial the Abbreviated Dialing Code e g common code 001 If the entire stored number is too long for your phone s ...

Page 69: ...y to all outside calls or just long dis tance calls Forced Account Codes for Toll Calls restricts calls according to the following chart Verified Account Codes With Verified Account Codes the system compares the Account Code the user dials to a list of up to 1000 pre programmed codes If the Account Code is in the list the call goes through If the code dialed is not in the list the system prevents ...

Page 70: ...ccount Code by watching the display and making note of the digits that dial out When hidden the Account Code digits show as the char acter on the telephone s display Account Code Capacity Account Codes print along with the other call data on the SMDR record after the call completes Account Codes can be 1 16 digits in length using 0 9 and Verified Account Codes can be from 3 16 digits long Redialed...

Page 71: ...rvice 1 15 enter 1 in this option to enable Account Codes for incoming calls Enter 0 to disable Account Codes for incoming calls If disabled any codes you enter dial out on the connected trunk 35 05 04 Account Code Setup Hiding Account Codes For each Class of Service 1 15 enter 1 to have the system hide Account Codes on an exten sion s display as they are entered Enter 0 to have the Account Codes ...

Page 72: ...ocedure instead of letting the system prompt you for your Account Code You may also use this procedure if your system has Optional Account Codes If your system has Verified Account Codes enabled be sure to choose a code pro grammed into your Verified Account Code list 1 Access trunk for outside call You can access a trunk by pressing a line key or dialing a code except 9 Refer to Central Office Ca...

Page 73: ...e and your display shows ENTER ACCOUNT CODE Dial OR Press your Account Code key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 code 50 Dial your Account Code 1 16 digits using 0 9 and If Account Codes are hidden each digit you dial will show an character on the telephone s display Dial OR Press your Account Code key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 code 50 To enter an Account Code for an incoming call This procedure is not available at ...

Page 74: ...ypass Forced Account Code entry 5 Dial number you want to call If you hear stutter dial tone after dialing the number ARS is requesting you to enter an ARS Authorization Code Refer to the Automatic Route Selection feature for more information on ARS Authorization Codes To enter an Account Code at a single line set 1 Access trunk for outside call You can access a trunk by dialing a code Refer to Ce...

Page 75: ...tment There are two types of Alarms Alarm 1 sounds only once at the preset time Alarm 2 sounds every day at the preset time Conditions Single line sets will ring and Music on Hold will be heard when the alarm sounds Default Setting Alarm is enabled Programming 20 01 06 System Options Alarm Duration Set the duration of the Alarm signal 0 64800 seconds Related Features None Aspila EX Available ...

Page 76: ... an error tone will be heard instead 5 At system phone press SPK to hang up OR At single line set hang up To silence an alarm 1 At system phone press CLEAR OR At single line set lift handset The single line set user will hear Music on Hold when the handset is lifted To check the programmed alarm time 1 Press CHECK 2 Dial 827 3 Dial alarm type 1 or 2 The programmed time displays 4 Press CLEAR To ca...

Page 77: ...e contrast is not adjustable when the telephone has background music enabled Default Setting Enabled for all display telephones except super display sets Programming 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 11 08 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Transfer Display In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s i...

Page 78: ...e output When connected to customer pro vided External Paging equipment the ACI port provides External Paging independent of the NTCPU external paging input To use the External Paging an extension user just dials the ACI analogue port extension number and makes the announcement The system broadcasts the announcement from the ACI analogue port and simultaneously closes the associated PGDAD relay Yo...

Page 79: ...ect Inward Dialing DID Direct Inward Line DIL Direct Inward System Access DISA Tie lines ACI Call Recording is not available for outgoing trunk calls transferred calls or Intercom calls You can set up recording on a per trunk or per extension basis Physical Ports and Software Ports Each PGDAD module consists of a physical port for connection to the phone system and four ana logue ports For program...

Page 80: ...ssign the ACI Call Recording destination on a per extension basis The destination can be an ACI port s extension number assigned in Program 11 06 or an ACI Department Group pilot number assigned in Program 11 08 33 01 01 ACI Port Type Setup Set each ACI software port 1 96 for input 1 or input output 2 Use input ports for Music on Hold sources Use output ports for External Paging ringer control 33 ...

Page 81: ... Paging One touch loud ringer control Paging External ACI software ports can provide External Paging with control independent of the External Paging circuits on the NTCPU PCB Operation To call an ACI software port 1 Press idle CALL key 2 Dial ACI software port extension number OR Dial ACI Department Group extension number OR Press One Touch Key for ACI extension or Department Group After you call ...

Page 82: ...SA DID DDI DIL tie line and transferred calls If the attendant doesn t have an appearance for the queued call it waits in line on a CALL key If the attendant has more than 32 calls queued an extension can Transfer a call to the attendant only if they have Busy Transfer enabled Attendant Call Queuing is a permanent non programmable system feature Conditions None Default Setting Enabled Programming ...

Page 83: ...customers Please stay on the line and we will help you shortly If the caller continues to wait you can have them hear another announcement called the 2nd Announcement such as Your business is important to us Your call will be automatically answered by the first available agent Please stay on the line If all the ACD Group s agents still are unavailable the call can automatically overflow to another...

Page 84: ...to 5 00 PM when your business is open Work Period 2 could be from 5 00 PM to 8 00 AM which covers those times when your business is closed Headset Operation With Automatic Answer An ACD Agent or ACD Group Supervisor can utilize a customer provided headset in place of the handset The headset conveniently frees up the user s hands for other work and provides privacy while on the call In addition an ...

Page 85: ...n five sections Trunk Calls Sorted by Extension Trunk Calls Sorted by Trunk ACD Calls Sorted by Agent ACD Calls Sorted by ACD Group All Trunks Busy Report Work Time Work Time temporarily busies out an ACD agent s phone so they can work at their desk uninterrupted This gives the agent time to fill out important logs and records as soon as they are finished with their call There are two types of Wor...

Page 86: ...rack of call volumes a display system phone user can view any ACD Group s Queue Status Display by pressing a uniquely programmed Programmable Func tion Key The user can the press VOL s and VOL t to scroll through all the system s ACD Group queues The display system phone does not have to be an ACD Agent or supervi sor Overflow Announcements from Voice Mail The NVM Series Voice Mail system can prov...

Page 87: ... Overflow Destination set to 65 the system will overflow the call to the ACD Group programmed in Program 41 09 The system will not allow you to program an ACD group with that ACD group as the overflow For more on Automatic Call Distribution refer to the ACD Manual P N TBD Conditions Refer to the ACD Manual P N TBD Default Setting Refer to the ACD Manual P N TBD Programming Refer to the ACD Manual ...

Page 88: ...ignments you make in this program apply to both the ACD Agent Work Schedules Pro gram 41 05 and the Trunk Work Schedules Program 41 06 41 08 01 ACD Overflow Options Overflow Operation Mode For each ACD Group 1 64 assign the overflow mode 0 9 Each ACD Group can have unique overflow options 41 08 02 ACD Overflow Options ACD Overflow Destination For each ACD Group 1 64 assign the destination ring gro...

Page 89: ... message source for the 2nd Delay Announcement Message 0 49 This program is activated when the delay announcement source and options are assigned as VRS in Program 41 08 41 11 05 VRS Message Number for Delay Announcement 2nd Delay Message Send ing Count For each ACD group 01 64 determine the 2nd Delay Message Sending Count 0 255 41 11 06 VRS Message Number for Delay Announcement Tone Kind at Messa...

Page 90: ...in off duty mode 0 can not receive 1 can receive 41 14 09 ACD Options Automatic Wrap Up End Time For each ACD Group 01 64 set how long the system waits before automatically ending wrap up time 0 disabled or 1 64800 seconds 41 14 10 ACD Options Supervising ACD Answer to Incoming Call For each ACD Group 01 64 set how long the system waits for Supervising ACD Answer 0 disabled or 1 64800 seconds 41 1...

Page 91: ...512 define the ACD group number 0 no setting 1 64 in mode 8 41 19 01 VRS Box Number for Delay Announcement Delay Message Start Timer For each ACD group 01 64 determine how long the system waits before playing the Delay Message 0 64800 seconds 41 19 02 VRS Box Number for Delay Announcement Mailbox for 1st Announcement Message For each ACD group 01 64 assign voice mail ACD Announcement Mailboxes as ...

Page 92: ...Automatic Call Distribution ACD 78 Features Aspila EX Software Manual Related Features Refer to the ACD Manual P N TBD Operation Refer to the ACD Manual P N TBD ...

Page 93: ... 1 200 This sets the access options for trunks 15 06 01 Trunk Access Map for Extensions Assign Trunk Access Maps 1 200 to extensions 44 01 01 System Options for ARS F Route Select whether the ARS F Route feature should use the time schedule 0 not used 1 used 44 02 01 Dial Analysis Table for ARS F Route Access Dial Set the Dial digits for the Pre Transaction Table for selecting ARS F Route 8 digits...

Page 94: ...lect the gain table number to be used for tandem connection 0 500 44 05 07 ARS F Route Table ARS Class of Service For each ARS F Route table 1 500 assign a priority number 1 4 Select the Class of Ser vice to be used for ARS 0 16 44 05 08 ARS F Route Table Dial Treatment For each ARS F Route table 1 500 assign a priority number 1 4 Select the Dial Treatment to be used 0 15 44 06 01 Additional Dial ...

Page 95: ...for outgoing ARS calls Related Features Abbreviated Dialing Abbreviated Dialing may bypass ARS routing Central Office Calls Placing Set up other options for outgoing calls e g unassign line keys adjust gains ARS access key loop keys etc Dial Tone Detection Refer to this feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detection Toll Restriction Toll Restriction overrides ARS Trunk Gro...

Page 96: ...callers on Hold Single Line Telephones Background Music is not available on single line telephones Programming 10 21 01 NTCPU Hardware Setup External Source Control Switch Selection Specify the function of the relay switch for external tone source control 0 external MOH source 1 BGM source 2 external speaker 3 general purpose relay 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service...

Page 97: ...r example you can assign Item 02 to use digit 5 for Barge In This would allow you to program a function key with an exten sion number plus the Barge In code i e 205 5 This allows one touch access to the Barge In feature for extension 205 If you undefine a service code be careful when you change this item that you don t inadvertently disable any essential dialing function such as Voice Mail or Mess...

Page 98: ... to enabled 1 or disable 0 a DISA or tie trunk user from using the Barge In feature with the service code defined in Program 11 12 08 20 18 07 Service Tone Timer Intrusion Tone Repeat Time After a user Barges In the system repeats the Barge In tone after this interval Normally you should disable this timer by entering 0 This timer also affect any other types of call interrup tion features such as ...

Page 99: ...ence call dial the extension number of a user active on a Con ference call When a new call is added to the conference an intrusion tone is heard by all parties depending on system programming and all display system phones show the joined party If Barge In is not possible the extension user will hear a warning tone the DISA user will be rerouted to the defined ring group OR the tie line user will h...

Page 100: ...Call Coverage 86 Features Aspila EX Software Manual Call Coverage Please refer to the Multiple Directory Numbers Call Coverage page 259 for information on this feature ...

Page 101: ...ransferred from another extension The extension user must enable Call Forwarding from their phone To redirect calls while a user is at another phone use Call Forwarding with Follow Me A periodic VRS announcement may remind users that their calls are forwarded Conditions A Normally the system does not allow the chaining of Call Forwards For example extension 316 forwards to 318 and 318 in turn forw...

Page 102: ...es Call Forwarding Fixed Fixed Call Forwarding is a permanent type of forwarding that automatically reroutes calls under certain condition without any user action User entered Call Forwarding overrides Fixed Call Forwarding Call Forwarding Off Premise An extension user can forward their calls to an off premise location Call Forwarding with Follow Me While away from their desk a user can redirect t...

Page 103: ... 4 Intercom calls only 5 Press SPK to hang up hang up at DSL SLT if you dialed 888 in step 1 Your DND or Call Forwarding Station Programmable Function Key flashes when Call Forwarding is activated Press Call Forwarding key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 code 10 for Forward All Calls Immediately PGM 15 07 or SC 851 code 11 for Forward when Busy PGM 15 07 or SC 851 code 12 for Forward when Unanswered PGM 15 07...

Page 104: ...manually set this operation In system programming the administrator can set the Fixed Call Forwarding destination and type for each extension and virtual extension The forwarding destination can be an on or off premise extension or Voice Mail The Fixed Call Forwarding types are Fixed Call Forwarding with Both Ringing Program 24 06 Option 1 Fixed Call Forwarding when Unanswered Program 24 06 Option...

Page 105: ...s not complete the loop If Fixed Call Forwarding Chaining finds an extension with user implemented Call Forward ing in the middle of a chain it rings that extension It does not continue routing to the other extensions in the chain If one of the extensions in a Fixed Call Forwarding chain has its fixed option set for Both Ringing 1 the system rings that extension It does not continue routing to the...

Page 106: ...Unanswered 3 Fixed Call Forwarding Immediate 4 Fixed Call Forwarding when Busy or Not Answered 24 07 01 Fixed Call Forwarding Off Premise For each extension assign the Fixed Call Forwarding Off Premise telephone number up to 24 digits Be sure to include the trunk access code Related Features Alphanumeric Display When a call is Fixed Call Forwarded the display at the destination shows from which ex...

Page 107: ...he pre programmed external party The destination telephone number is stored in the Common Abbrevi ated Dial area This feature may be used in case a co worker is out of the office All incoming calls for their extension will be automatically transferred to their external number example cell phone Off Premise Call Forward for Door Boxes can be transferred to the external party through ISDN lines only...

Page 108: ...11 10 18 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Off Premise Call Forward by Door Box Assign the service code to be used for Off Premise Calling Forwarding by a Door Box 822 by default 14 01 13 Basic Trunk Data Setup Loop Supervision Enable 1 loop supervision for each trunk that should be able to use Call Forwarding Off Premise 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys For one touch access to the Ca...

Page 109: ...all Forwarding Off Premise 1 At system phone press idle CALL key Dial 713 OR Press Call Forward Device key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 17 OR At DSL SLT lift handset and dial 713 2 Dial 6 HOLD 3 Press SPK or hang up at DSL SLT to hang up if you dialed 713 in step 1 Your DND or Call Forwarding Device Programmable Function Key stops flashing Off Premise Call Forwarding for Door Boxes These operations are per...

Page 110: ...g Off Premise 1 At system phone press idle CALL key Dial 822 OR Press Call Forward Device key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 54 OR At DSL SLT lift handset and dial 822 2 Dial 0 3 Press SPK or hang up at DSL SLT to hang up Your DND or Off Premise Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key stops flashing ...

Page 111: ...rding allows Door Box callers to be transferred automatically to the pre programmed external party The destination telephone number is stored in the Common Abbrevi ated Dial area This feature may be used in case a co worker is out of the office All incoming calls for their extension will be automatically transferred to their external number example cell phone Off Premise Call Forward for Door Boxe...

Page 112: ... Service Code Setup for System Administrator Off Premise Call Forward by Door Box Assign the service code to be used for Off Premise Calling Forwarding by a Door Box 822 by default 14 01 13 Basic Trunk Data Setup Loop Supervision Enable 1 loop supervision for each trunk that should be able to use Call Forwarding Off Premise 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys For one touch access to the Call Forwa...

Page 113: ...ystem phone press idle CALL key Dial 848 OR Press Call Forward Device key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 10 OR At DSL SLT lift handset and dial 848 2 Dial 0 3 Press SPK or hang up at DSL SLT to hang up if you dialed 848 in step 1 Your DND or Call Forwarding Device Programmable Function Key stops flashing Off Premise Call Forwarding for Door Boxes These operations are performed at the Door Box Ringing Extensi...

Page 114: ... Off Premise by Door Box 1 At system phone press idle CALL key Dial 822 OR Press Call Forward Device key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 54 OR At DSL SLT lift handset and dial 822 2 Dial 0 3 Press SPK or hang up at DSL SLT to hang up Your DND or Off Premise Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key stops flashing ...

Page 115: ...ing an extension in a Department Group will prevent that extension from receiv ing Department Pilot Calls B If a Programmable Function key is not defined for Call Forwarding 10 17 the DND key flashes to indicate that the extension is call forwarded Default Setting Enabled Programming 15 07 01 Programming Function Keys Assign a function key for one touch access to the Call Forwarding Station setup ...

Page 116: ... source 3 Dial Call Forwarding Type 2 All Calls 3 Outside calls only 4 Intercom calls only 4 SPK or hang up at DSL SLT if you dialed 888 in step 1 Your Call Forwarding Station Programmable Function Key flashes when Call For warding is activated To cancel Call Forward Follow Me 1 At system phone press idle CALL key and dial 888 OR Press Call Forward Station key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 15 OR At DSL SLT ...

Page 117: ... key for Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Override code 37 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 13 04 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Call Forwarding DND Override In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the ability to initiate Call For warding DND Override Related Features Programmable Function Keys Function keys s...

Page 118: ...Call Pickup Group 104 Features Aspila EX Software Manual Call Pickup Group Please refer to Group Call Pickup page 202 for information on this feature ...

Page 119: ...eature ACD Transferred Department Group all ring mode Door Box Virtual Extension Conditions A After pressing the Call Redirect key the call will not recall the extension B The pre defined destination has to be an extension number or voice mail pilot number Default Setting Disabled Programming 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign a function key for Call Redirect code 49 destination extension ...

Page 120: ... redirect a ringing call 1 With an incoming call ringing your extension press the Call Redirect key Program 15 07 or SC 851 49 Destination Extension Number without lifting the handset or pressing the CALL keys A confirmation tone is heard over the telephone s speaker ...

Page 121: ...g Enabled Programming 20 13 36 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Caller Timer In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to use the Call Timer 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service 1 15 to an extension 21 01 01 System Options for Outgoing Calls Trunk Interdigit Time External The system waits for this timer to expire bef...

Page 122: ...mming Function Keys Assign a function key for Camp On code 35 This key is also the Callback key 20 18 06 Service Tone Timer Call Waiting Tone Timer Use this option to set the interval between Call Waiting tones This timer also sets the interval between Off Hook Signaling alerts Related Features Callback If an extension user Camps On and then hangs up the system converts the Camp On to a Callback D...

Page 123: ...e Trunk Queuing To cancel a Camp On request 1 Hang up 2 At system phone press idle CALL key and Dial 870 OR At system phone press Camp On key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 35 OR At single line set lift handset and dial 870 To Split answer a waiting call at a single line telephone Listen for Camp On beep 1 Single Line Telephone Hookflash and dial 894 DSL Telephone Press HOLD and dial 894 To repeatedly split ...

Page 124: ... ring When Callback Automatic Answer is enabled a user answers the Callback ring when they lift the handset When Callback Automatic Answer is disabled the user must press the ringing line appearance to answer the Callback ring Conditions An extension can leave only one Callback request at a time Default Setting Enabled Programming 15 02 11 Multi Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Callback Automatic A...

Page 125: ... If you have Callback Automatic Answer you automatically place a call to the formerly busy extension when you lift the handset If you don t have Callback Automatic Answer you must press the ringing line appearance to place the call To cancel a Callback 1 At system phone press idle CALL key and Dial 870 OR At system phone press Camp On key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 35 OR At single line set lift handset a...

Page 126: ... You can set up the system to present the second call data automatically or allow the user to select the operation of second calls with service code 779 Caller ID supports the telco s Called Number Identification CNI and Called Number Delivery CND service when available These services provide the Caller ID information i e messages between the first and second ring burst of an incoming call There a...

Page 127: ...er With Caller ID name With number absence code 1 Trunk name Trunk name NN NN NN CID name 2 CID name CID name HH MM SS YY MM DD Without Caller ID number Without Caller ID name With number name absence codes 1 Trunk name Trunk name NN NN NN Name Absence Code 2 Name Absence Code Name Absence Code HH MM SS YY MM DD Without Caller ID number Without Caller ID name With number absence code 1 Trunk name ...

Page 128: ...ler ID is provided by the NTCPU The DSP daughter board which plugs onto the NTCPU can provide additional resources for Caller ID if needed Conditions To have pre answer Caller ID from the voice mail the call must be an unscreened transfer Default Setting Disabled Programming 14 01 20 Basic Trunk Data Setup Block Outgoing Caller ID Allow 1 or prevent 0 the system from automatically blocking outgoin...

Page 129: ...Options Supplementary Service Automatic Off Hook Sig nal In order for a display phone to show Caller ID information for a second incoming call must be enabled 1 20 19 01 System Options for Caller ID Caller ID Display Formatting Determine whether the first 10 digits 0 or last 10 digits 1 should be displayed when Caller ID exceeds 12 digits 20 19 02 System Options for Caller ID Caller ID Wait Timer ...

Page 130: ...lable phone You might also want to use Universal Answer in a noisy warehouse or machine shop where the volume of normal telephone ringing is not adequate After hearing the ringing over the Paging an employee can then easily pick up the call from a shop phone See Night Service for more on Universal Night Answer The Automatic Answer of Universal Answer Calls option Program 20 10 07 determines whethe...

Page 131: ...vision for the system 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions For Universal Answer assign a Class of Service 1 15 that enables Program to an extension 20 10 07 Class of Service Options Answer Service Automatic Answer of Universal Calls In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the extension s ability to use Auto Answer to pick up Universal Answer calls This allows a user to simply ...

Page 132: ...ntral Office Calls Answering Call Forward DID DIL DISA Do Not Disturb ISDN The Reason for Transfer option should be set for each type of trunk which will use the Reason for Transfer message Directed Call Pickup Group Call Pickup Using these features ringing calls can be picked up regardless of access map programming Direct Inward Line Direct Inward Lines ring an extension directly without Ring Gro...

Page 133: ...01 200 To use Universal Answer to answer a call ringing over the Paging system 1 At system phone press idle CALL key OR At single line set lift handset Depending on system programming this may answer the call and you can skip Step 2 2 Dial 872 If you hear error tone your extension s Class of Service prevents Universal Answer To listen to the incoming trunk ring choices system phone only 1 Press id...

Page 134: ...fault Setting Enabled Programming 10 03 03 PCB Setup For SLIU Unit Transmit CODEC Gain Type 10 03 04 PCB Setup For SLIU Unit Receive CODEC Gain Type Customize the transmit and receive levels of the CODEC Gain Types for single line tele phones 11 01 01 System Numbering Set up a Service Code for Alternate Trunk Route Access 11 09 01 Trunk Access Code If required change the single digit Trunk Access ...

Page 135: ...e 0 trunk calling 21 15 01 Alternate Trunk Route for Extensions Designate the trunk route accessed when a user dials the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code Refer to Trunk Group Routing to set up outbound routing 81 01 01 Analogue Trunk Data Setup Review the Analogue Trunk Timers for compatibility with the connected telco Related Features Alphanumeric Display Call Timer If the trunk name seize displ...

Page 136: ...in which users access trunks within a specific trunk group Operation To place a call over a trunk group 1 At system phone press idle CALL key OR At single line set lift handset 2 Dial 804 3 Dial line group number 1 9 or 001 100 4 Dial number OR 1 At system phone press trunk group key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 02 group Also see the Loop Keys feature 2 Dial number To place a call using Trunk Group Routing...

Page 137: ... To place a call over a specific trunk 1 At system phone press idle CALL key OR At single line set lift handset 2 Dial 805 3 Dial line number e g 005 for line 5 4 Dial number OR 1 At system phone press line key PGM 15 07 or SC 852 001 to 200 Also see the Loop Keys feature 2 Dial number ...

Page 138: ...s of Service via Service Code 777 is 0000 Program 90 02 02 0000 An extension can use Service Code 777 to change another extension s Class of Service Pro gram 20 13 28 1 An extension automatically blocks another extension s attempt to change their Class of Ser vice via Service Code 777 Program 20 13 28 0 The default Service Code for this option is 777 Program 11 11 24 777 Programming 11 11 24 Servi...

Page 139: ...ted Dialing number the telephone number will not be displayed This could be used if you wish to prevent Account Codes from being displayed 0 Off 1 On 1 0 11 10 04 05 Set Cancel Automatic Transfer to Transfer 0 Off 1 On 1 0 11 10 06 06 Charging Cost Display 0 Off 1 On 1 0 07 Not Used 08 Not Used 09 Not Used 1 0 11 10 15 10 Programmable Function Key Programming Appearance Level Enables disables an e...

Page 140: ...ls Enable disable Intercom calling for the extension 0 Off 1 On 1 0 02 Trunk Calls Enable disable outgoing trunk calling for the extension 0 Off 1 On 1 0 03 Common Abbreviated Dialing 0 Off 1 On 1 0 04 Group Abbreviated Dialing 0 Off 1 On 1 0 05 Dial Number Preview Enable disable an extension s ability to use Dial Number Pre view 0 Off 1 On 1 0 06 Toll Restriction Override Enables disables Toll Re...

Page 141: ... use Department Group Step Calling 0 Off 1 On 1 0 13 CLIP 0 Off 1 On 1 0 14 Call Address Information 0 Off 1 On 0 0 15 Block Outgoing Caller ID Enable 1 or disable 0 the system s ability to automatically block outgoing Caller ID information when a user places a call If this option is on the system automatically inserts the Caller ID block code defined in 14 01 21 before the user s dialed digits 0 ...

Page 142: ...s of Service Options Answer Service Program 20 10 Item No Item Input Data Default COS 01 14 COS 15 01 Group Call Pickup Within Group Enables disables Group Call Pickup for calls ringing an extension s own Pickup Group Service Code 867 0 Off 1 On 1 0 02 Call Pickup Another Group Group Call Pickup Another Group Enables disables Group Call Pickup for calls ringing outside a group Service Code 869 0 O...

Page 143: ... Enables disables an extension s ability to use Call Forward When Unanswered 0 Off 1 On 1 0 04 Call Forwarding Both Ringing Enables Disables an extension s ability to activate Call Forwarding with Both Ringing 0 Off 1 On 1 0 05 Call Forwarding with Follow Me Enables disables an extension s ability to initiate Call Forwarding with Follow Me 0 Off 1 On 1 0 06 Unscreened Transfer Enables disables an ...

Page 144: ...ability to transfer a call to a pre defined destination such as an operator voice mail or another extension without answering the call 0 Off 1 On 1 0 17 Call transfer setup for each telephone group 0 Off 1 On 1 0 18 No Recall Allow 0 or prevent 1 answered Transferred calls from recalling the originating extension 0 Off 1 On 0 0 19 Normal Extended Park Determine if an extension s Class of Service s...

Page 145: ...ference 0 Off 1 On 1 0 09 Privacy Release Enables disables an extension s ability to initiate a Voice Call Confer ence 0 Off 1 On 1 0 10 Barge In Mode Enables the extension s Barge In to be speech mode 0 or Monitor mode 1 0 Off 1 On 0 0 11 Room Monitor Initiating Extension Enable disable an extension s ability to initiate Room Monitor 0 Off 1 On 0 0 12 Room Monitor Extension Being Monitored Enable...

Page 146: ... ability to program its name 0 Off 1 On 1 0 22 Called Party Status Display the detail state of called party 0 Off 1 On 0 0 23 Display the Reason for Transfer Select whether an extension should display the reason a call is being transferred to their extension Call Forward Busy Call Forward No Answer DND 0 Off 1 On 0 0 24 Privacy Release by Pressing Line Key Enable 1 or disable 0 a user s ability to...

Page 147: ...er In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an exten sion s ability to use the Call Timer 0 Off 1 On 1 0 Class of Service Options DISA E M Service Program 20 14 Item No Item Input Data Default COS 01 14 COS 15 01 First Digit Absorption For tie lines enable or disable the ability to absorb ignore the first incoming digit Use this to make the tie trunk compatible with 3 and 4 digit t...

Page 148: ... Paging This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller s ability to use the telephone system s External Paging 0 Off 1 On 0 0 08 Direct Trunk Access This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller s ability to use Direct Trunk Access Service Code 815 0 Off 1 On 0 0 09 Forced Trunk Disconnect Not for ISDN T point This option enables or disables a tie trunk caller s ability to...

Page 149: ... you selected in step 3 and press HOLD You see MODE4 nn Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged 7 Enter the Rest 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press HOLD You see MODE5 nn Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged 8 Enter the Day 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press HOLD You see MODE6 nn Press HOLD to leave t...

Page 150: ... meet again to set the schedule Split cycles through the Conference in the same order in which the Conference was initially set up If a user places an outside call conferences extension 302 followed by extension 303 Split will cycle from the trunk to 302 and finally to 303 The Split cycle then repeats Barge Into Conference If a user s extension has Barge In capability enabled they can also Barge I...

Page 151: ... Level for Conference and Transfer Calls CODEC gain set at 0 dB 14 01 04 32 can be used to set the CODEC gain type for multi line Conference calls 15 07 01 Programming Function Keys Assign a function key for Conference code 07 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 13 08 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Conference In an extension s ...

Page 152: ...y Tandem Trunking A user can set up an Unsupervised Trunk to Trunk Conference and then drop out of the call allowing the remaining parties to continue the conversation Operation To establish a Conference System Phone 1 Establish Intercom or trunk call 2 Press CONF or Conference key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 07 3 Dial extension you want to add OR Access outside call OR Retrieve call from Park orbit To ge...

Page 153: ...e In to Conference Call 1 Pick up the handset or press SPK and dial the service code 810 default If the telephone doesn t have the proper COS a warning tone is sent After the user hangs up the system will automatically place a Callback to the extension 2 Dial the extension number or press a DSS key of a telephone within a Conference call When a new call is added to the conference an intrusion tone...

Page 154: ...de call is on a line key the user just presses the line key to switch modes If the call is on a loop key the user presses their Privacy Release function key instead For systems using the Privacy Mode Toggle option trunks initially have the privacy released If privacy is desired for a trunk use the toggle option or press the Privacy Release function key to switch modes Conditions A Each block assig...

Page 155: ... Set the interval users have to join a Voice Call Conference after it is announced Note that this interval is also used for Meet Me Conference Related Features Conference Set up a multiple party telephone meeting without leaving the office Programmable Function Keys Voice Call Conference requires a Voice Call Conference function key and line keys Single Line Telephones This feature is not availabl...

Page 156: ...mmon Carriers OCCs After the outside service answers the user can dial digits for whatever options the services allow Without Continued Dialing the system s Toll Restriction will cut off the call after a specific number of dialed digits See Programming below for additional information Conditions None Default Setting Enabled Programming 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class Of Ser...

Page 157: ... trunks and then dial DTMF digits after the service answers Toll Restriction The ability to use Continued Dialing on trunk calls is set by Toll Restriction programming Operation To use Continued Dialing 1 Place Intercom or trunk call 2 Continue dialing after call connects Toll Restriction and Class of Service programming may limit Continued Dialing ...

Page 158: ...the form of a momentary open loop to the analogue port required for voice mail Reverse polarity Message Wait lamping and Caller ID are NOT supported with this module An AC DC adapter is require for installation APA Module P N 0890057 The APR module is an analogue port adapter without a ringer function which can be used for outgoing calls e g modems It can transmit disconnect signal in the form of ...

Page 159: ... data module installed 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign Class of Service 1 15 to extensions Related Features Computer Telephony Integration CTI Applications CTI applications automate the office with TAPI compatibility and external PC control Hotel Motel inDepth inDepth These features require the use of a CTA or CTU module Prime Line Selection Do not set up Prime Line Selection for e...

Page 160: ... can optionally route the call to the first available group member The system follows Program 22 15 03 and 22 15 05 s timer for playing the periodic VRS message User Log Out Log In An extension user can log out and log in to a Department Calling Group By logging out the user removes their extension from the group Once logged out Department Calling bypasses their extension When they log back in Dep...

Page 161: ...isplay phone is waiting in queue the user will see WAITING group name If a transferred call in queue is an outside call and the system has DSP daughter board installed for VRS the queued caller will hear Please hold on All lines are busy Your call will be answered when a line becomes free The VRS can also Transfer calls to Department Groups Refer to Voice Response System VRS feature for more infor...

Page 162: ...Department Calling 148 Features Aspila EX Software Manual Description Cont d ...

Page 163: ...Department Calling Aspila EX Software Manual Features 149 Description Cont d ...

Page 164: ... or overflow to the first available Department Group member 1 This option is for Intercom calls to an extension not a pilot number 16 01 09 Department Group Basic Data Setup Department Hunting No Answer Time Set how long a call will ring a Department Group extension before hunting occurs 16 01 10 Department Group Basic Data Setup Hunt Type Set the type of hunting for each Department Group 0 No que...

Page 165: ...ime Program 24 02 04 Voice Mail Voice mail uses one Department Group for voice mail Operation To call a department 1 At system phone press idle CALL key OR At single line set lift handset 2 Dial department s extension number The system routes the call to the first free phone in the department To log out of your Department Calling Group While you are logged out Department Calling cannot route calls...

Page 166: ...Department Calling 152 Features Aspila EX Software Manual ...

Page 167: ... the Department Step Calling Single Digit Service Code 15 07 01 Programming Function Keys Assign a function key Department Step Calling code 36 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 08 12 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Department Step Calling In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to use D...

Page 168: ...ion To make a Step Call You step through Extension Groups set in Program 16 02 1 Place call to busy Department Group member OR Place call to Department Group pilot number 2 Press Step Call key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 36 3 Repeat step 2 to call other Department Group members ...

Page 169: ...e 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to use Dial Number Preview Related Features Central Office Calls Placing In order to place an outgoing call an extension user must have outgoing access to a line loop or trunk group key Operation To use Dial Number Preview to place a call system phone only 1 Do not lift the handset or press a CALL key 2 To preview any number press To preview an Abbreviated D...

Page 170: ... trunk calls since these calls provide no Call Progress tones Conditions None Default Setting Disabled Programming 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 18 05 Service Tone Timer System Phone Confirmation Tone If required change the Dial Pad Confirmation Tone frequency and duration Related Features Single Line Telephones Dial Pad Confirmation Ton...

Page 171: ...Last Number Redial the system can drop the trunk or optionally skip to the next trunk in the group Refer to the chart under Programming below for more Dial Tone Detection is available for the following features Automatic Route Selection Abbreviated Dialing Central Office Calls Placing Last Number Redial Loop Keys outbound Save Number Dialed T1 Trunking with ANI DNIS Compatibility Tie Lines Trunk G...

Page 172: ...iver Setup 80 04 01 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Use these programs to set the criteria for dial tone detection and call progress tone detection 14 02 11 Analogue Trunk Data Setup Next Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone If enabled the system will skip over a trunk if dial tone is not detected This option pertains to calls placed using Loop Keys Abbreviated Dial ARS Last Number Redial or Save Num...

Page 173: ...e 20 DID Translation Tables There is one translation made in each entry For a simple installation you can put all 2000 entries in the same table For more flexibility you can optionally distribute the 2000 entries among the 20 tables In addition to number conversion each DID Translation Table entry can have a name assigned to it When the DID call rings the destination extension the programmed name ...

Page 174: ...st or misdials Vacant Number Intercept can reroute the call to the programmed DID Intercept extension ring group or Voice Mail With out Vacant Number Intercept the caller hears error tone after misdialing Busy Intercept Busy Intercept determines DID routing when a DID caller dials a busy extension If Busy Intercept is enabled the call immediately routes to the programmed DID Intercept extension ri...

Page 175: ...the mailbox number defined in Program 22 11 02 Note Any valid DID number must be entered in the DID table Program 22 11 If a valid DID number is not entered there will be no ring destination for any incoming calls to that num ber the calls will not ring any extension in the system Conditions A Analogue DID requires the installation of a 4DIOPU A1 PCB provides four DID ports or 8DIOPU A1 PCB provid...

Page 176: ... Answer RNA Intercept interval 0 64800 seconds In systems with RNA Intercept the DID call rings the destination extension for this interval and then rings Intercept Ring Group 22 02 01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup For each Night Service Mode enter service type 3 when the trunk should be a DID trunk 22 04 01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Assign extensions to Ring Groups Calls ring the exten...

Page 177: ...rt 2 ACI port 22 11 10 DID Translation Table Number Conversion ACI Music Source Port For each DID Translation Table entry 1 2000 if item 2 is selected in 22 11 09 specify the port to be used for the source of music heard on DID trunks 22 12 01 DID Intercept Ring Group For each DID Translation Table program the DID Intercept destination The destination can be a Ring Group 1 100 DSPDB Voice Mail 101...

Page 178: ... calls with signaling options Refer to this feature for the specifics Programmable Function Keys To simplify answering DID calls assign function keys as line keys for the DID trunks Station Message Detail Recording SMDR can print trunk port names or received dialed number for ANI DNIS or DID trunks If enabled DNIS digits can be printed on the SMDR reports instead of the trunk name Operation DID ca...

Page 179: ...ng Group This could help a Technical Service department for example that covers calls for an Inside Sales department If the Inside Sales calls are not answered they ring into the Technical Service department Conditions A If unanswered a DIL without delayed ringing rings an extension until the outside party hangs up B If a DIL rings a Department Group and all agents are busy the system routes the c...

Page 180: ...the overflow to the ring group programmed in 22 08 Set the ringing in Program 22 06 0 trunks don t ring just flash line keys 1 trunks ring 22 07 01 DIL Assignment Set the destination extension port for each DIL for each Night Service mode The destination can be an extension port virtual extension port or Department Group 22 08 01 DIL IRG No Answer Destination For each DIL with delayed ringing ente...

Page 181: ...ill ring the key If not the call rings an available line appearance For other extensions the DIL indicates as busy Ring Groups A DIL will ring its assigned extension without Ring Group programming A DIL only rings its assigned extension It will not ring other extensions in a Ring Group Operation To answer a call on your Direct Inward Line 1 Lift handset 2 At system phone press flashing line key fo...

Page 182: ...nter a DISA password before proceeding The system associates the password entered with a specific user number which in turn has a Class of Service If the Class of Service allows the action such as making outgoing trunk calls the call goes through If the DISA Class of Service doesn t allow the action the system prevents the call The DISA Class of Service options are Trunk Group Routing ARS Access W...

Page 183: ...rectly The system can either drop the call or send it to a preset Ring Group called a the DISA Transfer Destination Department Calling with Overflow Message If a DISA caller dials a busy Department Calling Group the system can periodically play the voice prompt Please hold on All lines are busy Your call will be answered when a line becomes free while the caller waits The interval between the voic...

Page 184: ...val 0 64800 seconds 20 09 01 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Second Call for DID DISA DIL E M Enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to receive a second call from a DID DISA DIL or tie line caller 20 14 01 20 14 11 Class of Service Options for DISA E M Enable 1 or disable 0 the following options for each DISA Class of Service 1 15 First Digit Absorption Item 1 Trunk Group Rout...

Page 185: ...his is the maximum length of an Internal Page placed by a DISA caller If the Page contin ues longer than this interval 0 64800 seconds the system terminates the DISA call 25 07 10 System Timers for DID DISA DISA External Paging Time This is the maximum length of an External Page placed by a DISA caller If the Page contin ues longer than this interval 0 64800 seconds the system terminates the DISA ...

Page 186: ...utomatic Route Selection In a system with ARS enabled When a DISA caller dials 9 for an outside call if allowed the system routes the call via ARS In a system with ARS disabled When a DISA caller dials 9 for an outside call if allowed the system uses the routes pro grammed for Trunk Group Routing Central Office Calls Answering When a call is transferred because of Call Forwarding No Answer Call Fo...

Page 187: ...00 499 OR Dial 9 for Trunk Group Routing or ARS OR Dial Alternate Trunk Route Access Code if enabled OR Dial 804 a trunk group number 1 100 for an outside call OR Dial 805 a trunk number 1 200 for an outside call OR Dial 813 Common Abbreviated Dialing bin number OR Dial 0 for the operator OR Dial 801 an Internal Paging Zone number 0 1 9 00 01 64 OR Dial 803 an External Paging Zone number 1 8 or 0 ...

Page 188: ...ure Keys The maximum number of DSS Consoles allowed is 32 There is no limit on the number of 110 but ton DSS consoles per extension but an extension can have only one 24 button DSS console An extension can however have both a 24 button DSS and 110 button DSS console s installed Installation of the Consoles The 110 button console plugs into an ESIU port and is assigned to a system phone DSLT in Pro...

Page 189: ...extension number to which the DSS is installed and regardless of the type of system phone connected start programming the DSS keys at key number 25 Key 25 DSS key 1 20 02 03 System Options for System Telephones BLF Control and 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Automatic Off Hook Signal ing These programs set the conditions under which a Hotline Reverse Voice Over or DSS Con s...

Page 190: ...ox The 110 button DSS Console provides one touch calling and a Busy Lamp Field for Door Boxes Refer to the Door Box Feature when programming Door Boxes Night Service The 110 button DSS Console provides one touch Night Service switching Refer to the Night Service feature when programming Night Service options One Touch Calling Like a One Touch Key a user can have DSS Console keys for Direct Station...

Page 191: ...If you don t have Handsfree you must lift the handset to speak Answering a trunk call from your DSS Console 1 Press flashing DSS Console key assigned to trunk If you don t have Handsfree you must lift the handset to speak Calling a Door Box from your 110 button DSS Console 1 Press DOOR 2 Press DSS Console key for Door Box you want to call 1 8 If you don t have Handsfree you must lift the handset t...

Page 192: ...0 button DSS Console 1 Press PAGE 2 Press DSS Console External Page zone key 1 8 If the zone you want is busy try again later If you don t have Handsfree lift the handset to make your announcement Making an Internal Page using your 110 button DSS Console 1 Press GROUP 2 Press DSS Console Internal Page zone key Group key 1 64 If the zone you want is busy try again later If you don t have Handsfree ...

Page 193: ...ady enabled your console as their Alternate Answer destination Using a DSS Console key as a Programmable Function Key You can store Function codes under DSS Console keys 1 Press DSS Console key for function For example you can Forward your calls by pressing DSS Key 1 destination Your DSS key must have been previously programmed for the Call Forward feature Night Service Busy Lamp Field When this k...

Page 194: ...n extension such as Hold and Transfer recalls or calls on Hold B An extension can use Directed Call Pickup to intercept calls to which it is denied access in Pro grams 14 07 and 15 06 Default Setting Enabled Programming 20 10 05 Class of Service Options Answer Service Directed Call Pickup for Own Group Enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to use Directed Call Pickup for calls ringing their...

Page 195: ...ckup to intercept a call to a co worker s extension 1 At system phone press idle CALL key OR At single line set lift handset 2 Dial 715 3 Dial number of extension whose call you want to intercept If more than one call is coming in the system sets the priority for which call it will answer first ...

Page 196: ...orts directory names in alphabetical order based on the first four characters of the name when the system starts up or reboots In addition the system will re sort extension names when You change Program 15 01 01 Extension Numbers and Names Any user dials 800 and changes their extension s name B Directory Dialing follows all the programmed options and conditions for Abbreviated Dialing Intercom Cal...

Page 197: ... may have enabled For example if your extension cannot normally use Common Abbreviated Dialing Direc tory Dialing can t access it either 4 Dial letter number range for the party you want to call e g dial 2 for A B C or 2 5 Press the Down Arrow Soft Key to jump to that section 6 Press Volume s or t to scroll through the list If you wait too long between your selections Directory Dialing automatical...

Page 198: ... for more details Conditions None Default Setting Enabled Programming 15 02 02 System Telephone Basic Data Setup Trunk Ring Tone From the range specified in Program 22 03 select the system phone extension s trunk ring tone 15 02 03 System Telephone Basic Data Setup Extension Ring Tone Pitch Select the extension s intercom ring tone 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service...

Page 199: ...line telephone users cannot listen to or change the pitch of their phone s incoming ring Operation To listen to the incoming ring choices system phone only 1 Press idle CALL key 2 Dial 811 3 Dial 1 to check ringing for Intercom calls OR Dial 2 to check ringing for trunk calls 4 For Intercom calls select the pitch you want to check 1 8 OR For trunk calls select the pitch 1 8 and the tone 1 4 you wa...

Page 200: ...0 Do Not Disturbed canceled Conditions If there is no Call Forwarding key Program 15 07 10 17 the DND key will blink when the extension is forwarded Default Settings Enabled for all extensions Programming 11 12 01 Service Code Setup for Service Access Call Forwarding DND Override In order to use the DND Override service code if voice mail is installed the single digit ser vice code 11 16 09 must b...

Page 201: ...he call is ringing to their phone Direct Inward Line DIL DND modes 1 3 will cause calls to follow 22 08 programming even if the extension is forwarded Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns Set up DND flash patterns for DSS and Hotline keys Operation To activate or deactivate Do Not Disturb while your extension is idle System Phone 1 Do not lift the handset 2 Press DND key OR Press idle CALL...

Page 202: ...xtensions can receive Door Box chime tones Each Door Box has a pair of normally open relay contacts that can connect to an electric door strike Use these contacts to remotely control the entrance door After answering the Door Box chimes a system phone user can press FLASH to activate the Door Box contacts This in turn releases the electric strike on the entrance door The device connected to the Do...

Page 203: ...ime pattern 0 6 for each Door Box 32 03 02 Door Box Basic Setup CODEC Transmit Gain Setup 32 03 03 Door Box Basic Setup CODEC Receive Gain Setup Select the CODEC gain types 1 63 each Door Box 1 8 Related Features Paging External If a 2PGDAD has a Door Box connected you cannot use that port for External Paging Single Line Telephones Analogue Single Line Sets Door Boxes can ring single line phones i...

Page 204: ...l on one appearance with a call in progress on the other Conditions Normally both line appearances must be busy to return a busy signal to the caller however check any incoming features for specific interactions Default Setting Enabled Programming None Related Features Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns Set up busy and idle extension flash patterns for DSS and Hotline keys Off Hook Signa...

Page 205: ...Dual OPX 2 OPX Aspila EX Software Manual Features 191 Dual OPX 2 OPX Refer to the Single Line Telephones Analogue Sets page 327 for information on this fea ture ...

Page 206: ...nal Alarm Sensors 192 Features Aspila EX Software Manual External Alarm Sensors Description This is a future item and is not currently available Aspila EX This is a future item and is not currently available ...

Page 207: ...de caller can start their fax machine and send the fax This would benefit a salesperson on the road for example The salesperson could call their secretary and give a general report and then fax detailed figures when the conversation is over Direct Inward Line to Fax DILs provide direct routing to fax machines installed as system extensions Use a DIL for a fax only line for unattended sending and r...

Page 208: ...using a VRS set up a single digit dialing code which can be used to transfer callers to the fax machine Voice Mail When using voice mail you can provide the digit to be dialed to transfer the call to the ana logue port which is connected to the fax machine Operation To transfer a call to the fax machine System Phone 1 Press HOLD You hear Transfer dial tone 2 Dial fax machine extension number If yo...

Page 209: ...cess Flash enter 2 Otherwise enter 0 or 1 15 03 04 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Flashing In a single line telephone s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the ability to hookflash for system feature access 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service 1 15 to an extension 81 01 14 COIU Initial Data Setup Hookflash 1 Set the Flash duration 16 4080mS for analogue tru...

Page 210: ...Flash 196 Features Aspila EX Software Manual Operation To flash the trunk you are on System Phone and Digital Single Line 1 Press FLASH Single Line Set 1 Hookflash 2 Dial 806 ...

Page 211: ...ion on the systems standard numbering refer to Tables 1 1 1 2 and 1 5 at the beginning of this section The system provides a completely flexible system numbering plan Refer to the chart below and the Programming section for more details Aspila EX Available Flexible System Numbering Program Description 11 01 System Numbering Set the system s internal Intercom numbering plan The num bering plan incl...

Page 212: ... port 001 to 499 port 299 Refer to Table 6 System Number Plan Capacities on page 41 for the system s default number ing plan Programming 11 01 01 System Numbering Customize the system s internal Intercom numbering plan 11 02 01 Extension Numbering Assign extension numbers to extension ports The telephone s programming identity follows the port number not the extension number 11 09 01 Trunk Access ...

Page 213: ...Flexible System Numbering Aspila EX Software Manual Features 199 Related Features None Operation Refer to Tables 1 6 at the beginning of this section ...

Page 214: ...es not properly disconnect when the outside party hangs up Conditions None Default Setting COS1 Enabled COS 2 15 Disabled Programming 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 07 11 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Forced Trunk Disconnect In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the ability to use Forced Trunk Disconnect ...

Page 215: ...k You can now place a call on the free trunk 3 Press line key for the trunk disconnected in Step 2 OR Dial the trunk access code 805 trunk number for the trunk disconnected in Step 2 Single Line Telephone 1 Dial trunk access code 805 trunk number You hear busy tone Trunk numbers are 001 200 2 Dial 724 You hear confirmation beeps as the system disconnects the line 3 Hookflash You can now place a ca...

Page 216: ... calls Service Code 867 Code 25 for a phone ringing in another Pickup Group Service Code 869 used when the caller doesn t know the group number Code 26 group for a phone ringing in another specific Pickup Group Service Code 868 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service to an extension 1 15 20 10 01 Class of Service Options Answer Service Group Call Pickup Within Group In a...

Page 217: ...Pickup Group Call Pickup Groups 1 9 or 01 64 Priority Number 1 999 Related Features Central Office Calls Answering Users can pickup of calls regardless of their access map programming Directed Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup provides another way of answering a co worker s call Hold Park Group Call Pickup can not be used to answer calls recalling from Hold or Park Multiple Directory Numbers Call C...

Page 218: ...de 856 cannot pick up Ring Group calls To answer a call ringing a phone in another Pickup Group when you don t know the group number 1 At system phone press idle CALL key OR At single line telephone lift handset 2 System Phone only Press Group Call Pickup key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 25 OR Dial 869 To answer a call ringing a phone in another Pickup Group when you know the group number 1 At system phone...

Page 219: ...er does not pick the coworker s voices during a Group Listen Conditions None Default Setting Disabled Programming 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 13 26 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Group Listen In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the ability to activate Group Listen Related Features Headset Operation ...

Page 220: ...t Your co workers hear your caller s voice over your phone s speaker When you press SPK once you turn your Speakerphone on and your handset off The second press turns on Group Listen To Talk Handsfree after initiating Group Listen 1 Hang up To cancel Group Listen without hanging up your call 1 Do not hang up 2 Press flashing SPK You can talk to your caller over your handset Your co workers can no ...

Page 221: ...akerphone modules IP1WW HF are half duplex which may cause the speaker to turn off clip during conversations Default Setting Enabled Aspila EX Available Handsfree User can place and answer calls by pressing SPK instead of using the handset Automatic Handsfree User can press a line or line appearance key without first lifting the handset or pressing SPK An extension can have Automatic Handsfree for...

Page 222: ...d the phone Microphone Cutoff For privacy mute the phones microphone while on a call Single Line Telephones Handsfree and Monitor are not available to single line telephones Prime Line Selection Prime Line Selection affects how incoming and outgoing calls are handled and thus deter mines what happens when the user presses the SPK key Operation To talk Handsfree 1 Press SPK CALL key or line key 2 P...

Page 223: ... 10 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Switching from Handsfree Answerback to Forced Intercom Ringing In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to toggle between Handsfree Answerback and Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls dial 1 or Service Code 812 20 09 05 Class of Service Options Incoing Call Service Setting Handsfree Answerback ...

Page 224: ...ables Forced Intercom Ringing To enable Forced Intercom Ringing for your incoming Intercom calls 1 Press idle CALL key 2 Dial 823 3 Press SPK to hang up This disables Handsfree Answerback To change the way your Intercom call signals the extension you are calling 1 Dial 1 If ringing your call voice announces If voice announced your call starts to ring the destination This option is also available a...

Page 225: ... the speaker phone for calls Conditions A While in the headset mode the Headset function key becomes a release disconnect key and no dial tone is heard from the speaker B While in the headset mode the hook switch is not functional Default Setting Disabled Programming 15 07 01 Programming Function Keys Assign a function key for Headset operation code 05 20 02 05 System Options for System Telephones...

Page 226: ...Plug in the headset into the headset jack on the back of the phone 2 Program a Headset key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 05 You hear a confirmation beep To use the headset The Headset key lights when you re on a call To disconnect press the Headset key again You can still use the handset for calls or respond to voice announced Intercom calls with the headset plugged in The headset only activates when the He...

Page 227: ... Hold Group Hold If a user places a call on Group Hold another user in the Department Group can dial a code to pick up the call This lets members of a department easily pick up each other s calls Intercom Hold A user can place an Intercom call on Hold The Intercom call on Hold does not indicate at any other extension Hold Recall to Operator Hold Recall to Operator enhances how the system handles c...

Page 228: ... of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to pick up a call placed on Group Hold Service Code 862 20 11 13 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Hold Recall to Operator Enable 1 or disable 0 Hold Recall to Operator If enabled a call recalling an extension longer than the Hold Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time will recall the operator normally 200 If disabled the call will...

Page 229: ... flashes slowly while on Hold flashes fast when recalling OR 1 If you know the specific line number dial 772 Line number 001 200 To pick up an outside call on System Hold System Phone 1 Press flashing line loop CALL key OR 1 If you know the specific line number dial 772 Line number 001 200 Digital Single Line Telephone 1 Press HOLD OR 1 If you know the specific line number dial 772 Line number 001...

Page 230: ...SPK to hang up Single Line Telephone 1 Hookflash 2 Dial 832 3 Hang up To pick up a call on Group Hold System Phone 1 Press idle CALL key 2 Dial 862 Single Line Telephone 1 Lift handset 2 Dial 862 Intercom Hold To place an Intercom call on Intercom Hold 1 Press HOLD The CALL key flashes 2 Press SPK to hang up To pick up an Intercom call on Intercom Hold 1 Press SPK 2 Press flashing CALL key ...

Page 231: ...t calling a hotel motel employee with a system phone can enable and disable room to room calling Room Status with Printout An employee s DSS Console can indicate the status of the hotel motel rooms Optionally a printer connected to a CTA Module can print out room status reports Room Status occupied available ready and to be cleaned Room Telephone Call and Toll Restriction Information Do Not Distur...

Page 232: ... Guide P N TBD Default Setting Refer to the Hotel Motel User Guide P N TBD Programming Refer to the Hotel Motel User Guide P N TBD Related Features Room Monitor Room Monitor allows both system phone users and single line telephone users to monitor the activ ity at another extension For additional information refer to the Hotel Motel User Guide P N TBD Operation Refer to the Hotel Motel User Guide ...

Page 233: ...0 02 03 System Options for System Telephones BLF Control and 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Automatic Off Hook Signal ing Programs 20 02 03 and 20 13 06 set the conditions under which a Hotline Reverse Voice Over or DSS Console key indicates that an extension is busy With condition 1 in the follow ing chart the BLF LED is on only when both extension line appearances are bu...

Page 234: ...elephone number or Common Abbreviated Dialing number when the handset is lifted Off Hook Signaling If the partner s extension is busy Hotline does not automatically activate Off Hook Signaling Programmable Function Keys A Hotline is a uniquely programmed function key Operation To place a call to your Hotline partner 1 Press Hotline key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 01 partner s extension number You can opti...

Page 235: ...Hotline External Aspila EX Software Manual Features 221 Hotline External Refer to the Ringdown Extension Internal External page 309 for information on this feature ...

Page 236: ...al Time Status Window This window displays ACD agent status state and connection state Real Time Statistics Window The statistics window provides a visual perfor mance summary for lines agents and ACD Groups Call Queue and Wait Time Windows These windows show the number of calls in queue the longest wait time as well as the number of calls answered and abandoned Wallboard Template Use the wallboar...

Page 237: ...nformation refer to the inDepth inDepth Manual P N TBD for the specifics Conditions Refer to the inDepth inDepth Manual P N TBD for the specifics Default Setting InDepth inDepth not installed Programming Refer to the inDepth inDepth Manual P N TBD for the specifics Related Features Refer to the inDepth inDepth Manual P N TBD for the specifics Operation Refer to the inDepth inDepth Manual P N TBD f...

Page 238: ...ting Enabled Programming For Intercom 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 08 01 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Intercom Calls In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to place Intercom calls 20 17 01 Operator s Extension Assign the operator s extension 20 18 01 Service Tone Timer Extension...

Page 239: ...ice Code 821 and Forced Intercom Ringing Service Code 823 for incoming Intercom calls Related Features Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing Intercom calls can ring or be voice announced at the called extension Intercom Abandoned Call Display Intercom Abandoned Call Display remembers the last five Intercom calls to an extension Line Preference Ringing Line Preference can automatically answe...

Page 240: ...play shows your telephone s extension number port number and extension Department Group 3 Press CLEAR to return the normal time date display To change how Intercom calls ring your extension 1 Press the CALL key or lift the handset for DSL phones 2 Dial 823 to have calls ring your extension OR 3 Dial 821 to have calls voice announce to your extension ...

Page 241: ... out who called while they were out Conditions Intercom Abandon Call Display remembers the last five Intercom calls to an extension Default Setting Enabled Programming 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service 1 15 to an extension Related Features Intercom Intercom gives extension users access to other extensions Operation To display the list of Intercom calls you did not ...

Page 242: ...takes priority When the option for calling party subaddress is on the extension number will be sent as the subad dress information Both the calling party number and calling party subaddress are sent in a SETUP message as the calling party information element and a calling party subaddress information element Primary Rate Interface PRI The system is compatible with ISDN Primary Rate Interface PRI s...

Page 243: ... TBD for the specifics Default Setting None Programming Refer to the ISDN BRI Manual P N TBD and ISDN PRI Manual P N TBD for the specifics Related Features Refer to the ISDN BRI Manual P N TBD and ISDN PRI Manual P N TBD for the specifics Operation Refer to the ISDN BRI Manual P N TBD and ISDN PRI Manual P N TBD for the specifics ...

Page 244: ...e the software and forms to make unique system phone labels for each extension which can include key functions Hotline names or your own company s imprinted logo The Aspila EX Labelmaker requires A Windows compatible sheet fed printer e g laser or ink jet Microsoft Windows 3 1 or higher Conditions None Default Setting None Programming None Related Features None Operation None Aspila EX Available ...

Page 245: ...han 10 destination numbers are dialed the oldest number is automatically erased to make room for the new number Conditions Redial List requires the use of a display telephone Non display and single line phones can not use this feature Default Setting Enabled Programming 11 12 12 Service Code Setup for Service Access Last Number Dial Assign a service code 816 to use Last Number Dial 11 12 17 Servic...

Page 246: ...dle line key optional The system automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call 2 Press LND OR 1 At system phone press idle CALL key OR At single line telephone lift handset OR At DSL press FTR and REDIAL 2 Dial 816 The system automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call and dials the last number dialed To check the number saved for Last Number R...

Page 247: ...er places calls If a system phone has Outgo ing Intercom Line Preference the user hears Intercom dial tone when they lift the handset If a sys tem phone has Outgoing Trunk Line Preference the user hears trunk dial tone when they lift the handset Outgoing Line Preference also determines what happens at extensions with Idle Line Preference The user hears either trunk dial 9 or Intercom dial tone Aut...

Page 248: ...System Telephone Basic Data Setup Ringing Line Preference for Trunk Calls Enable Idle 0 or Ringing 1 Line Preference for trunk calls See the table below for interaction Note Program 22 01 01 sets Intercom 0 or trunk 1 call priority Program Ringing Intercom Call Ringing Trunk Call Lifting the handset 15 02 09 Intercom Preference 15 02 10 Trunk Preference 0 0 X X Seizes idle line appearance 0 0 X Se...

Page 249: ...at do not ring an extension 22 05 01 Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment Assign trunks to ring groups 1 100 Auto Answer for Non Ringing Lines only works for trunks that do not ring an extension 23 03 01 Universal Answer Auto Answer For each extension select the route that it will use for Auto Answer for Non Ringing Lines The routes correspond to the Trunk Group Routing table set in Program 14 06 ...

Page 250: ...y 14 01 15 Basic Trunk Data Setup Long Conversation Alarm Before Cut Off Enable 1 or disable 0 the Long Conversation Alarm for each trunk 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to extensions 20 13 02 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Long Conversation Cutoff Incoming Enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s class of service from using Long Conversation Cut...

Page 251: ...ming and outgoing CO calls after a set time period Direct Inward System Access DISA Tie Lines Long conversation cutoff is controlled separately for DISA and tie lines Warning Tone for Long Conversation Using the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature allows users on outgoing calls to hear a warning tone prior to the call disconnecting Operation Feature is automatic once programmed ...

Page 252: ...k in the group or from ARS if programmed Outgoing Only loop keys help ensure that an extension will always have a key available for placing calls Both Ways Loop Keys Both Ways loop keys combine the functions of both Incoming Only and Outgoing Only loop keys Both Ways loop keys work well for extension users that handle a moderate amount of calls and don t separate keys for incoming and outgoing cal...

Page 253: ...ension Ring Group Assignment Assign extensions to Ring Groups 1 100 An incoming loop key will ring only for those trunks programmed to ring Also see Program 22 05 22 05 01 Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment Assign trunks to Ring Groups 1 100 An incoming loop key will ring only for those trunks programmed to ring Also see Program 22 04 above Related Features Automatic Route Selection ARS Central ...

Page 254: ...connect to the call If there are additional calls waiting to be answered your display shows WAITING LOOP KEY To program a loop key 1 Press the SPK key 2 Dial 852 3 Press the key you want to program as a loop key 4 Dial 05 5 Dial the loop key type 0 Incoming only 1 Outgoing only 2 Both ways incoming and outgoing 6 Dial the loop key routing option for incoming outgoing or incoming and outgoing calls...

Page 255: ...s the number of avail able Conference circuits Make sure there are circuits available for Conference 15 07 01 Programming Function Keys Assign function keys for Conference code 07 External Zone Paging code 19 zone External All Call Paging code 20 Internal Zone Paging code 21 zone and Meet Me Con ference Paging Pickup code 23 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service 1 15 t...

Page 256: ... All Call OR Dial 751 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1 8 for Internal External Zones 1 8 or 0 for Internal External All Call OR Press Page key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 19 zone 20 3 Announce the zone 4 When co worker answers your page press the Conference key twice 5 Repeat steps 1 4 for each co worker you want to add Single Line Telephone 1 Single Line Telephone While on a call hookflash and dial 82...

Page 257: ...Zone code 1 8 for Internal External Zones 1 8 or 0 for Internal External All Call 3 Announce the zone 4 When co worker answers your page press the Conference key twice 5 Repeat steps 1 4 for each co worker you want to add Single Line Telephone 1 Single LineTelephone While on a call hookflash and dial 826 DSL Telephone While on a call press HOLD and dial 826 2 Dial 801 and the Internal Paging Zone ...

Page 258: ...At system phone press idle CALL key OR At single line telephone lift handset 2 Dial 863 if your extension is in the zone called OR Dial 864 and the zone number if your extension is not in the zone called OR Press the Meet Me Conference Paging Pickup key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 23 if your exten sion is in the zone called ...

Page 259: ...15 07 01 Programming Function Keys Assign function keys for External Zone Paging code 19 zone External All Call Paging code 20 Internal Zone Paging code 21 zone or Meet Me Conference Paging Pickup code 23 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 10 06 Class of Service Options Answer Service Meet Me Conference and Paging In an extension s Class of S...

Page 260: ...r All Call OR Dial 751 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1 8 for Internal External Zones 1 8 or 0 for Internal External All Call 3 Announce the zone OR 1 At system phone press the External Paging Zone key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 19 zone 20 2 Announce the zone To join a Meet Me External Page 1 At system phone press idle CALL key OR At single line telephone lift handset 2 Dial 865 3 Dial the announced E...

Page 261: ...al Zones 1 8 or 0 for Internal External All Call 3 Announce the zone OR 1 At system phone press the External Paging Zone key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 19 zone 20 2 Announce the zone To join a Meet Me Internal Page 1 At system phone press idle CALL key OR At single line telephone lift handset 2 Dial 863 if your extension is in the zone called OR Dial 864 and the zone number if your extension is not in th...

Page 262: ...it be installed in the system if more than one zone is required There is one zone available on the NTCPU Default Setting Enabled Programming Note For additional programming information on Paging refer to the Paging External and Paging Internal features 15 07 01 Programming Function Keys Assign function keys for External Zone Paging code 19 zone External All Call Paging code 20 Internal Zone Paging...

Page 263: ...tion Meet Me External Paging Transfer To make a Meet Me External Paging Transfer 1 At system phone while on a call press HOLD OR At single line telephone while on a call hookflash 2 Press the External Paging Zone key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 19 zone 20 OR Dial 803 and the External Paging Zone code 1 8 or 0 for All Call OR Dial 751 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1 8 for Internal External Zones 1 8 or...

Page 264: ...al Zones 1 8 or 0 for Internal External All Call 3 Announce the call 4 When Paged party answers hang up to Transfer the call to them The answering party connects to the trunk call when you hang up To join a Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer 1 At system phone press idle CALL key OR At single line telephone lift handset 2 Dial 863 if your extension is in the zone called OR Dial 864 and the zone numbe...

Page 265: ...mber the dialed digits do not output over the trunk Dialing Memo Dial digits does not interfere with a call in progress Conditions When Memo Dial calls out it outdials the entire stored number Memo Dial does not automatically strip out trunk or PBX access codes if entered as part of the stored number Default Setting Disabled Programming 15 07 01 Programming Function Keys Assign a function key for ...

Page 266: ...al number 1 Do not lift the handset 2 Press Memo Dial key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 31 3 Press idle CALL key The stored number dials out only if you store a trunk access code before the number OR Press line key The stored number dials out To check to see the stored Memo Dial number 1 Do not lift handset 2 Press Memo Dial key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 31 The stored number displays To cancel erase a stored Memo...

Page 267: ... methods are 1 Special dial tone 2 Intermittent ringing 3 VRS announcement Note the following items for this feature This feature can apply to any analogue single line telephone Since it s possible that a user will pick up the handset and dial without listening for dial tone the system is able to detect dialing during a VRS message and special dial tone All of the message waiting indication method...

Page 268: ...tures Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing When a user responds to a Message Waiting the system does not cancel the Message Waiting indication if the called party uses Handsfree Answerback The system cancels the indication only if the called party lifts the handset or presses SPK Hotel Motel With the Hotel Motel set up an employee with a system phone can send a Message Waiting to a room te...

Page 269: ...ine telephones lift the handset and dial 841 If the called extension doesn t answer dial 0 or press your Message Waiting key to automatically leave them a message Normally your MW LED goes out If it continues to flash you have new messages in your Voice Mail mailbox or a new General Message Go to To check your messages below To cancel all your Messages Waiting This includes messages you have left ...

Page 270: ...utomatically call the extension that left you a Message Waiting Single Line Telephones Without Message Waiting Lamps With VRS message only 1 Lift handset 2 After programmed delay the extension user hears the VRS message You have a message 3 Listen for dial tone With special dial tone only 1 Lift handset The system provides the special Message Wait dial tone immediately With VRS and special dial to...

Page 271: ...utoff key code 40 To program a Mic Cutoff key use code 02 as the entry The Mic Cutoff key will mute conversation on a handsfree call while the Handset Transmission Cutoff key will mute the handset transmission on a non handsfree call 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service 1 15 to an extension Related Features Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing Microphone Cutof...

Page 272: ...ss Microphone Cutoff key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 40 This turns off both the handset and Handsfree microphone To turn your telephone s microphone back on 1 Press MIC Use MIC only if you pressed it initially to turn off your Handsfree microphone OR Press Microphone Cutoff key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 40 Use the Microphone Cutoff key only if you pressed it initially to turn off your handset or Handsfree micro...

Page 273: ...he Call Coverage key to intercept their co worker s incoming call The user can also go off hook and press the Call Coverage key to call the covered extension If the covered extension is busy and they receive a second call the covering extension s Call Cov erage key will flash The user just presses the flashing key to pick up the call The Call Coverage keys follow the extension s Do Not Disturb and...

Page 274: ...y transfer the call to the virtual extension number example 5400 To allow calls to be queued at the virtual you must place the virtual within a Department Group and have the user transfer calls to the pilot number the call is in placed in a queue and will be answered in turn as soon as the extension is available Conditions A More than one extension can share the same Multiple Directory Number B An...

Page 275: ...ervice Options Answer Service Auto Off Hook Answer for Call Cov erage Keys Determine whether an extension s Call Coverage Key should be automatically answered when the handset is lifted 0 disabled 1 enabled With multiple ringing calls Programs 15 08 15 10 and 23 04 determine which call is answered first 23 04 01 Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions When an extension has a virtual extensi...

Page 276: ...ace an intercom call or dial a trunk access code to seize an outside line and place your call To set up a Call Coverage Key 1 Press idle CALL key or SPK key 2 Dial 852 3 Press the programmable key you want to program The previously programmed entry displays 4 Dial 03 5 Dial the number of the extension you want to cover 6 Press HOLD once for Immediate Ring To set for Delayed Ring skip to Step 8 7 D...

Page 277: ... 04 02 Music on Hold Setup Music Selection for Internal Source Set the Music on Hold selection The options are 0 silence 1 2 synthesized music selections 10 04 03 Music on Hold Setup Audio Gain Setup Set the Music on Hold audio gain 1 64 10 21 01 NTCPU Hardware Setup External Source Control Switch Selection Specify the function of the relay switch for external tone source control 0 external MOH so...

Page 278: ...r to the Analogue Communications Interface ACI feature for the specifics on setting up a PGDAD Module Related Features Single Line Telephones Single line telephones cannot change the Music on Hold tone Operation To change the Music on Hold tone 1 Press idle CALL key 2 Dial 881 3 Dial Music on Hold tone code 00 No Tone 01 General 02 Holiday 4 Press SPK to hang up ...

Page 279: ...sion Data Setup Extension Name Program number for system extensions 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign an Extension Name Change key 55 to extensions 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 09 02 Class of Service Options Incoing Call Service Trunk Name Display Incoming In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the displaying ...

Page 280: ...an be up to 12 digits long Use this keypad digit When you want to 1 Enter characters 1 _ 2 Enter characters A C a c 2 3 Enter characters D F a f 3 4 Enter characters G I g i 4 5 Enter characters J L j l 5 6 Enter characters M O m o 6 7 Enter characters P S p s 7 8 Enter characters T V t v 8 9 Enter characters W Z w z 9 0 Enter characters 0 Enter characters Accepts an entry only required if two let...

Page 281: ...swer provides an answering point for Night Service calls For certain applications this may be more appropriate than Universal Night Answer For example you could program trunks to ring the security station telephone during off hours Universal Night Answer UNA Universal Night Answer makes incoming calls ring over the External Paging speakers With UNA an employee can go to a telephone and press the f...

Page 282: ...OH source 1 BGM source 2 External Speaker 3 General Purpose Relay 11 10 01 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Day Night Mode Switching Customize the service code 818 to be used for day night mode switching 11 12 50 Service Code Setup for Service Access General Purpose Relay Define the service code to be used for turning the general purpose relay on and off default 880 11 15 09 Service Cod...

Page 283: ...t up the Trunk Access Maps 1 200 For UNA extension must have incoming access to trunk ringing the External Paging speakers 15 06 01 Trunk Access Map for Extensions For UNA answering assign Trunk Access Maps 1 200 to extensions Make one entry for each Night Service mode 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign Night Service function keys 09 to extensions and set the key for the proper mode Day Ni...

Page 284: ...the external page The code the caller would dial is defined in Program 25 06 02 Operation To activate Night Service by dialing codes 1 At system phone press idle CALL key OR At single line telephone lift handset 2 Dial 818 3 Dial Night Service code 1 Day 1 mode 2 Night 1 mode 3 Midnight 1 mode 4 Rest 1 mode 5 Day 2 mode 6 Night 2 mode 7 Midnight 2 mode 8 Rest 2 mode 4 Press SPK to hang up To activ...

Page 285: ...g a single beep in the handset a beep in the speaker or a beep in the handset based on the caller s programming Off Hook Ringing Use this option to enable or disable an extension s Off Hook Signaling for incoming calls DID trunk If enabled Off Hook Signaling occurs normally If disabled calls queue behind the extension s busy line appearance and the user gets no Off Hook Signaling indication The se...

Page 286: ...pplementary Service Automatic Off Hook Signaling In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the extension s ability to automat ically send Off Hook Signals while busy on a handset call 20 18 06 Service Tone Timer Call Waiting Tone Timer Use this timer to set the interval between Off Hook Signaling alerts Related Features Call Waiting Camp On and Callback An extension user cannot Camp...

Page 287: ... automatically 1 Press Off Hook Signaling key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 33 You hear ringback To have your call voice announce dial 1 To have Off Hook Signals ring your extension 1 Press idle CALL key 2 Dial 893 To answer the signal you must first hang up your current call or place it on Hold To have Off Hook Signals voice announce at your extension You can only receive voice announce while you are busy ...

Page 288: ... can chain dial with One Touch Keys For example a user can store the number for a company s Automated Attendant in key 1 and employee extension numbers in keys 2 5 The user presses key 1 to call the company then one of keys 2 5 to ring the employee to which they want to speak An extension user or system administrator can optionally store a Flash command under a One Touch Key This is helpful for On...

Page 289: ...d system features Transfer When transferring a call an extension user can press a One Touch Key instead of dialing the extension number Operation When entering names in the procedures below refer to this chart Names can be up to 12 digits long Use this keypad digit When you want to 1 Enter characters 1 _ 2 Enter characters A C a c 2 3 Enter characters D F a f 3 4 Enter characters G I g i 4 5 Enter...

Page 290: ... Group Service Code 804 plus the trunk group number e g 1 4 Dial number you want to store The total of the digits stored in steps 3 and 4 cannot exceed 24 To store a Flash com mand press the FLASH key 5 Press HOLD 6 Enter the name associated with the key you are programming 7 Press HOLD 8 Press SPK to hang up To enter a pause press MIC To program a One Touch Key for Personal Speed Dial if your pho...

Page 291: ...1 Press idle CALL key and dial 855 2 Press One Touch Key you want to program 3 Dial general trunk access code 9 OR Dial Specific Trunk Service Code 805 plus the trunk number e g 005 OR Dial Trunk Group Service Code 804 plus the trunk group number e g 1 4 Press HOLD 5 Enter the name associated with the key you are programming 6 Press HOLD 7 Press SPK to hang up Service Codes To assign a Service Cod...

Page 292: ...Touch Keys 1 Press first One Touch Key Let the stored function dial out 2 Press another One Touch Key The stored digits dial out Checking One Touch Keys To check the function of a One Touch Key 1 Press CHECK 2 Press One Touch Key The stored function displays Repeat this step to check additional keys If you cannot see the entire number stored dial 3 Press CLEAR ...

Page 293: ...al zone For example you can Page your company s warehouse and outside loading dock at the same time Combined Paging is available for Paging zones 1 9 and All Call Refer to Paging Internal page 282 for more on setting up Combined Paging In addition you can program a Function Key as a Combined Paging key Using the External Page Function Key when an All Call External Page Function Key is programmed i...

Page 294: ...one 31 05 01 Universal Night Answer Assign Universal Night Answer ringing to each External Paging zone For each trunk port you make a separate entry for each External Paging zone 1 9 31 06 01 External Speaker Control Assign options for each External Paging Zone 1 9 Splash Tone Before Page Item 1 Splash Tone After Page Item 2 31 06 04 External Speaker Control CODEC Transmit Gain Setup 31 06 05 Exte...

Page 295: ...press idle CALL key OR At single line telephone lift handset 2 Dial 803 and the External Paging Zone code 1 9 or 0 for All Call OR Dial 751 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1 9 for Internal External Zones 1 9 or 0 for Internal External All Call Display indicates the Combined Paging as an External Page If the Internal Page Zone is busy or if there are no extensions in a page group the page may be ...

Page 296: ...internal page zone is busy or there are no extensions in a page group the announcement will be made on the external zones only Remove Paging Information from Display Phones A Class of Service option is available in system programming to prevent display telephones from showing incoming internal paging information This allows the system to save processor time and speed up system operation Conditions...

Page 297: ...nouncements If prevented extension can only make All Call Internal Paging announcements 31 03 01 Internal Paging Group Settings Internal Paging Group Name Program names for the Internal Paging Zones 31 03 02 Internal Paging Group Settings Internal Paging Tone For each Internal Paging Zone have normal 0 muted 1 or no 2 Internal Paging alert tones If enabled 0 or 1 extensions hear two beeps before P...

Page 298: ...e 1 9 for Internal External Zones 1 9 or 0 for Internal External All Call Display indicates the Combined Paging as an External Page If the Internal Page Zone is busy or if there are no extensions in a page group the page will be announced as an External Page only 3 Make announcement 4 Press SPK to hang up Single Line Telephone 1 Lift handset 2 Dial 801 and the Paging Zone number 0 9 or 00 64 Diali...

Page 299: ...Paging Privacy Release Aspila EX Software Manual Features 285 Paging Privacy Release Please refer to Conference Voice Call Privacy Release page 140 for information on this feature ...

Page 300: ...e that the system processes all digits a user dials Splitting Between Parked Calls A system phone user can retrieve two calls from Park Orbit for which they don t have line appear ances and easily split alternate between them The split operation brings the calls to the user s telephone and frees up the Park Orbits Extended Park An extension s Class of Service determines whether it will use the nor...

Page 301: ...ion that initially parked it for this interval 24 01 06 System Options for Hold Park Hold Time Set the Park Hold Time 0 64800 seconds A call left parked longer than this interval will recall the extension that initially parked it 24 01 07 System Options for Hold Extended Park Hold Time Set the Extended Park Hold Time 0 64800 seconds A call left parked longer than this inter val will recall the ext...

Page 302: ...sy Try another orbit 3 Use Paging to announce call 4 Press SPK to hang up If not picked up the call will recall to you Note The parked call recalls after the Park Hold Time Program 24 01 06 The call rings the extension to which it recalled for the Hold Recall Callback Time Program 24 01 02 The call then goes on Hold for the Park Hold Time then recalls again for the Hold Recall Callback Time The ca...

Page 303: ... DSL skip pressing CALL To split between two parked calls System Phone Only You must have Park Orbit keys for the parked in calls In addition your system phone cannot have line keys defined for the parked calls 1 Press CALL1 2 Press Park Orbit key PGM 15 07 or SC 852 04 orbit to retrieve first parked call Call1 lights steadily This moves the first parked call to your phone 3 Press HOLD and press S...

Page 304: ... restricts the dig its dialed after the PBX access code PBX Call Restriction When the phone system does the Toll Restriction it can further restrict users from dialing PBX extensions In this case the only valid numbers are those dialed after the PBX trunk access code The only PBX facility phone system users can access are the PBX s outside trunks Automatic Pause The system automatically pauses whe...

Page 305: ...st as they are stored Central Office Calls Answering Ring Groups Users answer incoming calls on PBX trunks just like other trunks All of the relevant access and Ring Group programming applies Refer to these features for more details Central Office Calls Placing Except for dialing the PBX access code users place calls on PBX trunks just like other trunks All of the relevant access programming appli...

Page 306: ...group key PGM 15 07 or SC 852 02 group 2 Dial PBX access code and number OR 1 At system phone press idle CALL key and dial 9 OR At single line telephone lift handset and dial 9 2 Dial PBX access code and number OR 1 At system phone press idle CALL key OR At single line telephone Lift handset 2 Dial 805 3 Dial PBX trunk number e g 005 for line 5 4 Dial PBX access code and number OR 1 Press PBX trun...

Page 307: ...keter just lifts the handset and the Prime Line is always available Outgoing Prime Line Preference may be affected by Incoming Prime Line Preference see Programming below Incoming Prime Line Preference When the Prime Line rings the extension lifting the handset answers the call Incoming Prime Line Preference could benefit the Service Department dispatcher who must quickly answer customer s service...

Page 308: ...ns Set assignment so extension s can have access to Prime Line Deny outbound access to extensions that should not have Prime Line 21 02 01 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions Assign extension s to a Prime Line route 1 100 for outgoing Prime Line access 22 01 01 System Options for Incoming Calls Incoming Call Priority Set incoming Prime Line preference Enter 1 to answer ringing Prime Line enter 0 to...

Page 309: ...on To place a call on your Prime Line 1 Lift handset You hear dial tone on your Prime Line To answer a call on your Prime Line 1 Lift handset Depending on your Line Preference programming you ll either answer the Prime Line or get dial tone on the idle line appearance ...

Page 310: ... for Incoming option 7 for Both Ways and option 4 for Outgoing In all other Access Maps give option 3 to the Private Line 15 06 01 Trunk Access Map for Extensions Assign extension to have Private Line to an unused Private Line Access Map 15 07 01 Programming Function Keys Make sure extension has a line key e g 012 for the Private Line 22 02 01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Set the Trunk Service Type t...

Page 311: ...ne key for each Private Line Single Line Telephones Private Lines are not available on single line telephones Toll Restriction Private Lines follow normal Toll Restriction Transfer An extension user can Transfer their Private Line Since other users have hold access see Programming the destination can answer the transferred Private Line and place it on Hold Voice Mail If the DSPDBVoice Mail is inst...

Page 312: ...ich is already defined but which doesn t exist on the phone will display as DUPLICATE DATA It is recommend to either clear these non existent keys or to only copy from an extension which has the same or fewer number of keys than the extension to which the programming is being copied C When using Program 15 07 01 to program 24 Button DLS Console keys use the extension number to which the DLS is ins...

Page 313: ...re 00 99 refer to chart and line keys 001 200 To undefine a key enter 00 To change the function of an Appearance Function programmable key 1 Press idle CALL key 2 Dial 852 3 Press the key you want to program 4 Enter the 3 digit key function and any additional information needed for the key Available functions are 00 99 refer to chart and line keys 001 200 To undefine a key enter 000 When a key is ...

Page 314: ...g security code and desired number The system dials the digits after the conversion as DTMF Conditions Pulse to Tone Conversion is only valid for Dial Pulse trunks Program14 02 01 options 0 or 1 Default Setting Enabled Programming 14 02 07 Analogue Trunk Data Setup DP to DTMF Conversion Options For each trunk set the type of DP to DTMF Conversion required automatic 0 automatic and manual 1 or manu...

Page 315: ...ce 1 15 to an extension 20 08 07 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Repeat Redial In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to use Repeat Redial 21 08 01 Repeat Dial Setup Repeat Redial Count Set how many times Repeat Redial will automatically repeat if the call does not go through 21 08 02 Repeat Dial Setup Repeat Redial Interval Time Set the inte...

Page 316: ...ial may only work across a network when the call is made by ARS Single Line Telephones Single line telephones cannot use Repeat Redial Operation To use Repeat Redial if the outside party you call is unavailable or busy 1 Place trunk call Listen for busy tone or ring no answer 2 Press DIAL LND OR Press Repeat Redial Key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 29 Your Repeat Redial key flashes while you wait for the sy...

Page 317: ...ce Over key also shows at a glance the status of the associated extension Note When the system phone is idle the Reverse Voice Over provides one button calling to the associ ated extension like a Hotline key An extension user cannot however use the Reverse Voice Over key to Transfer calls Conditions A An extension can have Reverse Voice Over keys for more than one extension limited only by the num...

Page 318: ... affect how the Intercom feature works Program these options as needed One Touch Calling One Touch Calling provides one button access to co workers but without the Busy Lamp Field provided by Reverse Voice Over Programmable Function Keys Reverse Voice Over requires a uniquely programmed function key Single Line Telephones Reverse Voice Over is not available at single line telephones Voice Over If ...

Page 319: ...teadily green and you can talk with the pro grammed Reverse Voice Over destination To return to your initial caller 1 Release the Reverse Voice Over key If the co worker you call hangs up you return to the initial call automatically WHEN YOUR PHONE IS IDLE To place a call to your Reverse Voice Over destination 1 Press your Reverse Voice Over key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 47 dest ext You can optionally l...

Page 320: ...eys codes 1 200 22 04 01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Assign extensions to ring groups 1 100 22 05 01 Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment Assign trunks to ring groups 1 100 22 08 01 DIL IRG No Answer Destination For DIL Delayed Ringing assign the DIL No Answer Ring Group An unanswered DIL rings this group after the DIL No Answer Time Program 22 01 04 expires DIL Delayed Ringing can al...

Page 321: ...s Trunk 3 rings Program 22 04 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Ring Group1 1 2 3 Trunk 1 X Trunk 2 X Trunk 3 X X Trunk assigned to indicated Ring Group 1 Make the same 22 05 entry for all Night Service modes Program 22 05 Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment Ring Group 1 2 3 Ext 301 1 01 01 Ext 302 01 1 01 Ext 303 01 01 1 1 Extension rings 0 Extension doesn t ring 1 To allow extension user...

Page 322: ...rd Dial DID Direct Inward System Access DISA DID DISA overflow options can be to a Ring Group Direct Inward Line DIL DILs ring extensions without being in a Ring Group Night Service Ring Group programming can be different for each Night Service mode Programmable Function Keys Function keys simplify answering incoming calls Transfer Transferring calls to a Ring Group using a service code forwards t...

Page 323: ...ion user must lift the handset for ringdown to work Default Setting Disabled Programming 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 08 09 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Hotline Extension Ringdown In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 ringdown If disabled in Class of Service the settings in Program 21 11 below have n...

Page 324: ...k Forced Intercom Ringing If the destination extension has Handsfree Answerback enabled the call will voice announce If the destination extension has Forced Intercom Ringing enabled the call will ring Multiple Directory Numbers Call Coverage Keys A Multiple Directory Number key can be a ringdown destination This would allow a front door key to be programmed on every extension Operation To place a ...

Page 325: ...off hook on the monitored phone and from another single line phone dials a service code and the extension number The activity of the area where the monitored phone is placed can then be heard at the monitoring phone This service is available until the handset of the monitored telephone is placed on hook Conditions A Room Monitor is for listening only It does not allow for conversation between the ...

Page 326: ... Monitor Enable 1 or disable 0 a single line telephone s ability to use Room Monitor Related Features Programmable Function Keys Room Monitor requires uniquely programmed function keys Operation You must activate Room Monitor at the extension initiating the monitor and at the extension you want to monitor You can only listen to one extension at a time Keysets To activate Room Monitor at the initia...

Page 327: ... handset on the desk placing the handset s transmitter towards the room You cannot place or answer other calls while Room Monitor is active To activate Room Monitor at the initiating extension 1 Lift handset at the phone which will be monitoring another phone 2 Dial 770 3 Dial 2 4 Dial number of extension number which will be monitored You cannot place or answer other calls while Room Monitor is a...

Page 328: ...all However the extension user can preselect a specific trunk if desired Conditions None Default Setting Enabled Programming 15 07 01 Programming Function Keys Assign a function key as a Save key code 30 Related Features Automatic Route Selection For systems with Automatic Route Selection ARS selects the trunk for the call unless the user pre selects Central Office Calls Placing Other programmed o...

Page 329: ...lash 2 Dial 815 To redial a saved number System Phone 1 Optional Press line key This selects a specific trunk for the call 2 Press Save Number Dialed key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 30 The stored number dials out OR 1 Press idle CALL key 2 Dial 815 OR Press Save Number Dialed key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 30 Save Number Dialed automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your origi nal call The stored n...

Page 330: ...y PGM 15 07 or SC 851 30 The stored number displays for ten seconds The stored number dials out if you Lift the handset Press an idle line key Press an idle CALL key or Press SPK 2 Press CLEAR To clear your saved number System Phone 1 Press idle CALL key 2 Dial 885 3 Press SPK to hang up Single Line Telephone 1 Lift handset and dial 885 2 Hang up ...

Page 331: ...ss in an important meeting After being alerted the boss could call the secretary when it s most convenient An extension can have Secretary Call keys for any number of extensions limited only by the avail able number of programmable keys Conditions A Secretary Call is not available to single line telephone users B Secretary Call does not set up an Intercom call C When assigning Secretary Call a use...

Page 332: ...etary s buzzer key flashes fast To check to see who left you a Secretary Call 1 Do not lift handset 2 Press CHECK 3 Press flashing Secretary Call key 4 Press CLEAR To answer your Secretary Call indication 1 Place an Intercom call to the extension that called you To cancel a Secretary Call you left at another extension 1 Press your lit Secretary Call key To cancel a Secretary Call left at your exte...

Page 333: ...n can have Secretary Call Pickup keys for any number of extensions limited only by the available number of programmable keys Conditions Secretary Call Pickup is not available to single line telephone users Default Setting Disabled Programming 15 07 01 Programming Function Keys Assign function keys for Secretary Call Pickup 42 boss ext Unlike Secretary Call you do not have to program a correspondin...

Page 334: ...y Call Pickup key lights and the Boss s telephone display shows BOSS FWD Calls intended for covered extension ring your phone instead To cancel Secretary Call Pickup 1 Press your lit Secretary Call Pickup key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 42 boss ext To check a key s Secretary Call Pickup assignment 1 Press CHECK 2 Press your Secretary Call Coverage key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 42 boss ext 3 Press CLEAR ...

Page 335: ...characters For example an extension user could select the message ON VACATION UNTIL and then enter the date Callers see the original message followed by the appended date They would then be able to tell when the user was coming back from vacation The system allows for a maximum of 50 phones using the Selectable Display Messaging feature at the same time The default messages are Conditions None Def...

Page 336: ... or disable 0 an extension s ability to use Selectable Display Messaging 20 16 01 Selectable Display Messages Program the Selectable Display Messages 1 20 Refer to the chart below for character entry Related Features Do Not Disturb The DND key blinks when an extension is forwarded and it does not have Programmable Function Key programmed for 16 or 17 Programmable Function Keys Function keys simpli...

Page 337: ...Use VOL s or VOL t to scroll through the messages 3 Optional for messages 1 8 and 10 Dial the digits you want to append to the message You can append messages 1 8 and 10 with digits e g the time when you will be back You enter the time in 24 hour format but it displays in 12 hour format 4 Press SPK to hang up To cancel a message 1 Press idle CALL key dial 713 OR Press Call Forward Device key PGM 1...

Page 338: ...s important in a crowded work area where several phones are close together Because their phone has a characteristic ring the user always can tell when it s their phone ringing Conditions None Default Setting Enabled Programming None Related Features Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns This feature can be used to change the default ring tones Single Line Telephones Single line telephones c...

Page 339: ...ttern 1 8 5 Press SPK to hang up To listen to the incoming ring choices 1 Press idle CALL key 2 Dial 811 3 Dial 1 to listen to Intercom ring 2 to listen to trunk ring For trunk ring enter the tone to which you want to listen 4 For Intercom Ring Dial code for the ring pattern you want to hear 1 8 OR For Trunk Ring Dial code for the ring pattern you want to hear 1 8 and then dial the tone for the ri...

Page 340: ... back Conditions The transferring extension can remain off hook to auto receive the callback or hang up and it will ring back to them Default Setting Disabled Programming 15 07 01 Programming Function Keys Assign a programmable key as a Serial Call key code 43 Related Features Programmable Function Keys Serial Call requires a uniquely programmed function key Single Line Telephones Serial Call is n...

Page 341: ...ive CODEC Gain Type Assign transmit and receive levels for single line telephones 10 09 01 DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup If the system has DTMF single line extensions allocate at least one circuit for analogue exten sion DTMF reception entry 0 or 1 Use the following as a guide when allocating DTMF receivers In light traffic sites allocate one DTMF receiver for every 10 devices that use them In ...

Page 342: ...individual features listed in the Related Features chart above Abbreviated Dialing Department Step Calling Message Waiting Account Codes Directed Call Pickup Night Service Alarm Do Not Disturb Off Hook Signaling Automatic Route Selection Door Box Paging Barge In Flash PBX Compatibility Call Forwarding Forced Trunk Disconnect Pulse to Tone Conversion Call Forwarding with Follow Me Group Call Pickup...

Page 343: ...have a CONF or MSG key that is found on all other system phones For these features the user must dial the equivalent service code Conference is HOLD 826 and Message Waiting is 841 The digital single line telephone can not have any modules installed The digital single line telephone does not have a seperate socket for headset connection The digital single line telephone does not have any One Touch ...

Page 344: ...tware Manual Related Features Digital single line telephone users have access to the same features as a system phone Refer to the individual features for additional descriptive programming and operational information Operation Refer to the individual features ...

Page 345: ...On to a busy co worker Conditions If a feature is restricted by an extension s Class of Service though the Soft Key menu will still dis play the option the user can not set the feature Default Setting Display shows time date extension Soft Key menu information Programming None Related Features Volume Controls The feature must be active to change the volume ex phone must be ringing page being heard...

Page 346: ... for your preference Transferred Call Tracking SMDR shows each extension s share of a transferred call If an outside call is transferred among four extensions SMDR shows how long each of the callers stayed on the call Data Call Tracking Data Call Tracking can log the system s internal data calls Since SMDR normally logs exter nal trunk data calls Data Call Tracking lets you get a complete picture ...

Page 347: ...ting easier since you review only those calls with variable costs Usage Summaries SMDR can automatically print daily weekly and monthly call activity summaries Each sum mary includes the total number of regular trunk calls and ISDN trunk calls and the costs for each type The daily report prints every day at midnight The weekly report prints every Sun day night at midnight The monthly report prints...

Page 348: ...umber of call owner i e extension that first placed or answered call For Transferred calls there can be more than one owner depending on how many extensions shared the call DIALLED No CLI For outgoing calls the number dialed or for incoming calls the Caller ID information COST For system with ARS indicates the call cost OR ACCOUNT Account Code number entered by extension user Class Definitions POT...

Page 349: ... LF Carriage return and line feed Header Line 2 1 5 CLASS 6 Space 7 10 TIME 11 14 Spaces 15 18 LINE 19 22 Spaces 23 30 DURATION 31 32 Spaces 33 39 STATION 40 42 Spaces 43 48 DIALED 49 Space 50 56 No CLI 57 63 Spaces 64 74 ACCOUNT CR LF Carriage return and line feed LF Line feed SMDR Record 1 4 Call type e g POT for outgoing 5 Space 6 10 Time in 24 hour clock HH MM 11 Space 12 21 LINE space line nu...

Page 350: ...phone assigned in Program 90 11 01 normally extension 301 shows SMDR Buffer Full indicat ing that the buffer is full To clear the buffer the SMDR information must be printed out When not using SMDR make sure Program 90 13 01 0 or Program 90 11 01 0 otherwise the SMDR alarm will display to the extension in Program 90 11 01 or to the operator s exten sion C When SMDR reports are enabled using the sa...

Page 351: ...utgoing calls regardless of the number of digits dialed 35 01 06 SMDR Options Minimum Call Duration Enter the minimum duration of a call 1 65535 that will print on the SMDR report Enter 0 to have calls of any duration print 35 01 07 SMDR Options Minimum Ringing Time Enter how long an unanswered call must ring 1 65535 before SMDR logs it as No Answer Enter 0 to allow all No Answer calls to print 35...

Page 352: ...80 05 01 Date Format for SMDR and System Reports Set the date format for SMDR 0 American 1 Japanese or 2 European 90 12 01 System Alarm Output Output Port Type Indicate the type of connection used for the SMDR 0 No setting 1 COM port NTCPU 2 USB port NTCPU 4 CTA CTU 90 12 02 System Alarm Output Destination Extension Number If the output port type 90 12 01 is set to CTA enter the extension number w...

Page 353: ...l from one salesperson Place a call to the second salesperson Set up the trunk to trunk Conference Drop out of the call The office manager could terminate the Conference at any time There are two methods for Enhanced Tandem Trunking Method A Set Up Without Transfer Key An extension user can set up Tandem Trunking Unsupervised Conference by using the CONF key This option uses a uniquely programmed ...

Page 354: ...ansfer Service Trunk to Trunk Transfer Disable 0 the Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction option Tandem Trunking Method B Tandem Trunking on Hang up 10 07 01 Conversation Record Circuits The number of circuits assigned as Conversation Record circuits limits the number of avail able Conference circuits Make sure there are circuits available for Conference 14 01 04 Basic Trunk Data Setup Transmit Gai...

Page 355: ...add more calls to the tandem call repeat from Step 2 or to set up the tandem call press CONF key twice This sets up a Conference between you and both outside parties 5 Press Transfer key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 06 To end the Tandem Call 1 Press either flashing line key The line keys light steadily green You can listen i e monitor to the call or rejoin the conversation based on the setting in Program 2...

Page 356: ...er systems with the same extension numbering plan Use the first digit to differentiate between the systems Tie line callers can dial 3200 3456 for the first system s extensions and 4200 4456 for the second sys tem s extensions The receiving system ignores the first digit and routes calls correctly to the extension dialed i e 4301 is received as 301 Trunk Group Routing ARS Access When a tie line us...

Page 357: ...party and the two parties on the initial call Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction You can selectively deny incoming tie lines access to your system s outgoing trunk groups Incom ing tie line callers could be able to access your outgoing WATS lines for example but not your DDD trunks The system allows you to set up a restriction matrix for each of your incoming tie lines for each of your outgoing tr...

Page 358: ...a tie line user dials 9 the system uses the routes defined in this program 1 100 Also see Program 34 03 If the system has ARS the tie line user accesses ARS when they dial 9 20 01 01 System Options DTMF Receiver Active Time After answering the tie line call the system attaches a DTMF receiver to the tie line for this interval 0 64800 seconds 20 09 01 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service ...

Page 359: ...all progress tone detection for tie line calls 81 03 01 4TLIU Initial Data Setup Make sure the Tie Line Timer settings are compatible with your local telco Related Features Automatic Route Selection Trunk Group Routing In a system with ARS enabled When a tie line user dials 9 for an outside call the system routes the call via ARS In a system with ARS disabled When a tie line user dials 9 for an ou...

Page 360: ...5 for line 5 3 Dial number OR 1 Press tie line key PGM 15 07 or SC 852 01 1 200 2 Dial number To Barge In after calling a busy extension The call must be set up for about 10 seconds before you can Barge In Listen for busy ring or busy tone 1 Call busy extension using tie line trunk 2 Press Barge In key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 34 After calling the remote system you may be able to Dial 9 to place an out...

Page 361: ... 8 for Time and Date i e Time and Date format 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 07 03 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Time and Date In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the extension s ability to set the Time and Date Aspila EX Available Central Office Calls Access Maps Ring Groups Class of Service Class Stat...

Page 362: ... depending on the COS mode setup Single Line Telephones Single line telephones cannot set the Time and Date Operation The date must be set in system programming 10 01 To set the system Time 1 Press idle CALL key 2 Dial 828 3 Dial two digits for the hour 24 hour clock 13 1 00 PM 4 Dial two digits for the minutes 00 60 5 Press SPK to hang up ...

Page 363: ...same Toll Restriction Class has both Permit and Restrict Code Tables the sys tem restricts calls that you enter only in the Restrict Code Table Calls entered in both tables are not restricted The system provides 4 tables with 60 entries restricted codes in each table A restricted code is 12 digits maximum using 0 9 and FLASH as a wild card Permit Code Table The Permit Code Table lets you set up To...

Page 364: ...an place calls on Toll Free Trunks anytime to anywhere without inadvertently being toll restricted PBX Call Restriction Toll Restriction programming lets you enable disable PBX Call Restriction and enter PBX access codes You only need to do this if your system is behind a PBX and you have trunks programmed for behind PBX operation Refer to PBX Compatibility feature for the specifics Conditions A I...

Page 365: ...iction Class you select disable 0 or enable the Restrict Code Table When enabling select from tables 1 4 in Program 21 06 07 21 05 09 Toll Restriction Class Restriction for Common Abbreviated Dialing For the Toll Restriction Class you select enable 1 or disable 0 Toll Restriction for Com mon Abbreviated Dialing numbers 21 05 10 Toll Restriction Class Restriction for Group Abbreviated Dialing Numbe...

Page 366: ... Restriction Direct Inward System Access DISA Tie Lines When using DISA or tie lines additional programming is required for Toll Restriction DISA see Program 25 10 tie lines see Program 34 04 Toll Restriction Dial Block A user can temporarily block their extension s Toll Restriction access preventing unwanted calls from being placed on their phone while they are away from their desk Toll Restricti...

Page 367: ...iority to the setting in Program 21 10 Default Setting Disabled Programming 11 10 17 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Dial Block by Supervisor Assign a service code 101 by default to be used by the supervisor to set Dial Block for another extension 11 11 33 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Dial Block Assign a service code 100 by default to be used for Dial Block 20 06 01 Cla...

Page 368: ... Press SPK or replace the handset to hang up To release Dial Block 1 At system phone press idle CALL key OR At single line telephone lift handset 2 Dial 700 3 Dial the 4 digit Dial Block code 4 Dial 0 A confirmation tone is heard 5 Press SPK or replace the handset to hang up To set Dial Block from another extension 1 At system phone press idle CALL key OR At single line telephone lift handset 2 Di...

Page 369: ...from another extension 1 At system phone press idle CALL key OR At single line telephone lift handset 2 Dial 701 3 Dial the 4 digit Dial Block code 4 Dial the extension number to be released from Dial Block 5 Dial 0 A confirmation tone is heard 6 Press SPK or replace the handset to hang up ...

Page 370: ...3 for Toll Restriction Override 20 08 06 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Toll Restriction Override In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the ability to use Toll Restriction Override 21 01 07 System Options for Outgoing Calls Toll Restriction Override Time Set the Toll Restriction Override Time 0 64800 seconds After dialing the Toll Restriction Override codes the s...

Page 371: ...annot go through Please call the operator when they dial a number that Toll Restriction prevents Operation To temporarily override a restricted extension s Toll Restriction You can override restriction for only one call at a time 1 At system phone press idle CALL key OR At single line telephone lift handset 2 Dial 763 3 Dial the 6 digit Toll Restriction Override code If you wait too long before go...

Page 372: ...presses a busy line key and waits for the call to complete The system automatically sends them the call when the internal caller hangs up Automatic On Hook Transfer Operation With Automatic On Hook Transfer a Transfer goes through as soon as the transferring user hangs up For example extension 304 can answer a trunk press HOLD dial 305 and hang up The system extends the call to extension 305 Witho...

Page 373: ...Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the extension s ability to use Transfer Without Holding 20 11 08 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Transfer Display In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the extension s incoming Transfer pre answer display 20 11 11 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Automatic On Hook Transfer In an extension s Class of Service enab...

Page 374: ...stem phone or DSL press HOLD OR At single line telephone hookflash You hear Transfer dial tone 2 Dial co worker s extension number If the extension is busy or doesn t answer you can dial another extension number or press the line key to return to the call In addition you may be able to hang up and have the call Camp On SLT users can retrieve the call by pressing hookflash If a call has been transf...

Page 375: ...u may be able to hang up and have the call Camp On SLT users can retrieve the call by pressing hookflash If a call has been transferred and the sibgle line user has hung up the handset the call be can retrieved by dialing 815 and the extension number to which it had been transferred 3 Announce your call and hang up With Automatic On Hook Transfer When you hang up the cal is automatically transferr...

Page 376: ...r group Conditions None Default Setting Enabled All trunks are in Group 1 Programming 11 01 01 System Numbering Set up a Service Code for Alternate Trunk Route Access 11 09 01 Trunk Access Code If required change the single digit Trunk Access Code normally 9 If you change this code you must also review the settings in 11 01 for the new code selected 11 09 02 Trunk Access Code Alternate Trunk Route...

Page 377: ...ute the user can dial the Universal Answer code 872 to pick up the call This program also allows an extension user to automat ically answer trunk calls ringing other extensions based on Trunk Group Routing program ming defined in Program 14 06 Trunk Group Routing 1 100 25 10 01 Trunk Group Routing for DISA Assign the Trunk Group Route chosen when a user places a DISA call into the system and dials...

Page 378: ... separate Trunk Group Routing programs Dial Tone Detection Refer to this feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detection Programmable Function Keys Programmable Function Keys simplify placing calls using Trunk Group Routing Ringing Line Preference The system uses Trunk Group Routing programming Program 14 06 when setting up Ring ing Line Preference Trunk Groups Use trunk gr...

Page 379: ...skip over a trunk if dial tone is not detected This pertains to calls using Loop Keys Speed Dial ARS Last Number Redial or Save number Dialed 0 disabled 1 enabled It does not pertain to line keys or Direct Trunk Access calls 14 05 01 Trunk Groups Assign trunks to trunk groups 1 100 14 07 01 Trunk Access Map Setup Assign trunks to Access Maps 1 200 15 06 01 Trunk Access Map for Extensions Assign Ac...

Page 380: ...ction Refer to this feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detection Direct Inward Dialing DID All DID trunks of the same type should be placed in the same trunk group These trunk groups must then be assigned to a DID Translation Table Loop Keys Program a function key as a Loop Key to allow an extension user to answer incoming trunks within a trunk group Programmable Functio...

Page 381: ... At system phone press idle CALL key OR At single line telephone lift handset 2 Dial 804 3 Dial trunk group number 1 9 or 001 100 4 Dial number OR 1 Press trunk group key PGM 15 07 or SC 852 02 group 2 Dial number To answer an incoming trunk group call 1 Lift handset 2 Press flashing trunk group key ...

Page 382: ...umber of extensions may simultaneously queue or Camp On for the same trunk or trunk group When a trunk becomes free the system connects the extensions in the order that the requests were left Conditions None Default Setting Enabled Programming 15 07 01 Programming Function Keys Assign a function key for Trunk Queuing and Trunk Camp On code 35 20 01 08 System Options Trunk Queuing Callback Time Set...

Page 383: ...r pro gram these options as needed ex access line loop keys etc Programmable Function Keys Function keys simplify Trunk Queuing operation Operation To queue for a busy trunk 1 Try to access busy trunk 2 Press Trunk Queuing Camp On key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 35 3 Hang up to leave a Trunk Queuing request OR Wait off hook to Camp On to the trunk To answer when Trunk Queuing calls you back 1 Lift handset...

Page 384: ...Universal Answer 370 Features Aspila EX Software Manual Universal Answer Please refer to Central Office Calls Answering page 116 for information on this feature ...

Page 385: ...e a message in the called extension s mailbox There is no need to call back later A VRS announcement can periodically remind users that they messages waiting to which they have not responded Transferring to Voice Mail By using Transfer to Voice Mail a system phone extension user can Transfer a call to the user s own or a co worker s mailbox After the Transfer goes through the caller can leave a me...

Page 386: ...y calls trying to get to the voice mail will be placed in queue As the voice mail ports become available the calls will be connected to the voice mail in the order in which they were received As the Voice Mail Queue follows Department Hunting programming the queue can hold a maxi mum of 10 calls If the queue is full or if the voice mail ports are not assigned to a Department Group the calls will b...

Page 387: ...Mail to ring other Voice Mail extensions when the DIL s assigned port is busy Assign up to Voice Mail extensions to an Extension Department Group Only one Voice Mail group is allowed per system 20 02 09 System Options for System Telephones Disconnect Supervision Enable 1 disconnect supervision for the system 20 03 01 System Options for Single Line Telephones SLT Call Waiting Answer Mode Enter 1 fo...

Page 388: ...is option to be changed in programming the language will only change if the DSPDB has the firmware which provides the newly selected language 45 01 01 Voice Mail Integration Options Voice Mail Department Group Number Assign which Extension Department Group number 0 64 is to be assigned as the voice mail group An entry of 0 means there is no voice mail installed 45 01 02 Voice Mail Integration Opti...

Page 389: ...er from Voice Mail Data Communications With APA APR modules installed make sure to setup up other required programming Direct Inward Line To have the Voice Mail Automated Attendant answer a trunk program the trunk as a DIL to a Voice Mail port Message Waiting Message Waiting functions normally with Voice Mail installed One Touch Calling An extension can have a One Touch Key for the Voice Mail Mast...

Page 390: ...R Press idle CALL key and dial 717 2 If requested by Voice Mail enter your security code Ask your Voice Mail system administrator for your security code Normally your MW LED goes out if applicable If it continues to flash you have unanswered Message Waiting requests or a new General Message Go to To check your messages below Single Line Telephone 1 Lift handset and dial 717 If you are at a co work...

Page 391: ...er your active call to a mailbox System Phone 1 Press HOLD 2 Press Voice Mail key PGM 15 07 or SC 851 code 77 3 Dial number of mailbox to receive Transfer This number can be your mailbox number or a co worker s mailbox number OR Press DSS Console or One Touch key for extension who s mailbox will receive the Transfer If the Transfer destination is an extension forwarded to Voice Mail the call waits...

Page 392: ...le Line Telephone 1 Single Line Telephone Hookflash DSL Telephone HOLD 2 Dial 754 The system automatically reconnects you to your call To stop recording hookflash twice You can restart and stop recording as required PERSONAL ANSWERING MACHINE EMULATION System Phone Only To enable or cancel Personal Answering Machine Emulation 1 Press idle CALL key or lift handset at DSL SLT and dial 888 OR Press y...

Page 393: ...y or idle CALL key for a new call The message is recorded in your mailbox OR 1 Press SPK to cut off the message broadcast and send the call to your mailbox Voice Mail records the entire message in your mailbox CHECKING YOUR MESSAGES System Phone Only To check your messages 1 Press CHECK 2 Dial 841 You can have any combination of the message types in the table below on your phone 3 Press VOL s or V...

Page 394: ...ralegal could announce the urgent call as soon as it comes in The lawyer could then give the paralegal instructions how to handle the situation all without the origi nal client hearing the conversation Either a system phone or single line user can initiate a Voice Over but only a system phone user can receive a Voice Over To enable Voice Over a system phone should have a function key programmed fo...

Page 395: ...vice code assigned in Program 11 16 04 to hear Voice Over tone 21 01 03 System Options for Outgoing Calls Trunk Interdigit Time External Program how long an extension must wait before using the Voice Over feature can be used on a call this timer waits until this timer expires before putting a call in a talk state This timer also affects Barge In Related Features Conference An extension user cannot...

Page 396: ...0 for Voice Over Program 11 16 08 Voice Mail Ser vice Code must be undefined To respond to a Voice Over alert tone to your extension You can only respond if you have a Voice Over key 1 Press and hold flashing Voice Over key The Voice Over key lights steadily green and you can talk to the interrupting party You cannot respond by dialing the Voice Over Service Code To return to your original call 1 ...

Page 397: ... greetings the General Message and the 900 Preamble message The maximum duration of any one VRS message is not programmable VRS messages are stored permanently in the event of a power failure Any on premise extension DISA or DID caller can listen record and erase VRS Messages unless restricted in programming DISA and DID callers use the same procedures as on premise users except that they must add...

Page 398: ...esets any recorded Personal Greetings are kept Park and Page When an extension user is away from their phone Park and Page can let them know when they have a call waiting to be answered To enable Park and Page the user records a Personal Greeting along with an additional Paging announcement Park and Page will then answer an incoming call and play the Personal Greeting to the caller The caller then...

Page 399: ...o place an order dial 1 To check on an existing order dial 2 To speak with an operator dial 0 You can set up single digit dialing for each VRS Message programmed to answer outside calls via the Automated Attendant This allows you to set up day night holiday greetings or unique greetings for each incoming trunk Keep in mind that with a default system if you assign destinations to digits 3 4 and 5 o...

Page 400: ...00 calls comes in when all VRS ports are busy the call will not appear on an extension until a VRS port is available You can also use the 900 Preamble message to set up an Auto Answer with Greeting application When a receptionist answers a call the VRS can play a preamble message such as Welcome to ABC Company How can I help you When the caller replies the receptionist answers One moment please an...

Page 401: ...S Error Message For each Night Service mode enter 1 if trunk should be automatically answered by VRS 25 03 01 DID DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing Set the destination that Automated Attendant OPA calls ring if the OPA caller dials an incorrect extension number This also sets the options for DISA calls The system allows Ring Groups 1 100 DSPDB Voice Mail 101 In Skin Voice Mail 102 or...

Page 402: ...to play the fixed VRS messages such as You have a message 40 10 02 Voice Announcement Service Option General Message Number Enter the number of the VRS message you want to use for the General Message 01 48 The message you select should not be used as a VRS message 40 10 03 Voice Announcement Service Option VRS No Answer Destination When all VRS ports are busy incoming DILs and DISA calls wait for ...

Page 403: ...reviously recorded VRS message 1 Press idle CALL key OR At a single line telephone lift handset 2 Dial 716 3 Dial 5 Listen 4 Dial the VRS message number to which you want to listen 01 48 You ll hear the previously recorded message If you hear a beep instead there is no previous message recorded 5 Press to hear the message again OR To hear another message press 5 and then enter the message number 0...

Page 404: ...W LED flashes when there is a new General Message A voice message period ically reminds you 1 Do not lift the handset or press CALL 2 Dial 4 General OR 1 At lift the handset and dial 711 You will hear the General Message Normally your MW LED goes out If it continues to flash you have unanswered Message Waiting requests or new messages in your Voice Mail mailbox To record listen to or erase the Gen...

Page 405: ...ering 813 bin Greeting without forwarding so caller hears busy by entering your extension number You cannot forward to a Department Group pilot number 5 Dial Personal Greeting type 2 All calls 3 Outside calls only 4 Intercom calls only 6 Press SPK to hang up or hang up at DSL SLT Your DND or Call Forwarding Device Programmable Function Key flashes when Call Forwarding is activated To cancel your P...

Page 406: ...y or lift handset at DSL SLT 2 Dial 815 your extension number To cancel your Park and Page 1 Press idle CALL key or lift handset at DSL SLT 2 Dial 713 73 3 Press SPK to hang up or hang up at DSL SLT TIME DATE AND STATION NUMBER CHECK To check the extension number of any system phone 1 Do not lift the handset or press idle CALL key 2 Dial 6 for extension Number To check the system time and date fro...

Page 407: ... display The users should set the vol umes for their most comfortable levels Conditions The contrast is not adjustable when the phone has background music enabled or if it is a super display telephone Default Setting Enabled Programming None Related Features None Operation To adjust the volume of incoming ringing and splash tone 1 If the phone is idle dial 829 If the phone is ringing skip to Step ...

Page 408: ...laces a trunk call Alarm Tone 2 broadcasts periodi cally after Alarm Tone 1 as a continued reminder Each alarm tone consists of three short beeps Warning Tone for DISA Callers For DISA callers with this feature enabled the warning tone timer begins when an incoming DISA call places an outgoing call and either the inter digit timer expires or the outgoing call is answered With this feature enabled ...

Page 409: ...l the user hangs up 21 01 01 System Options for Outgoing Calls Trunk Interdigit Time External Determine the length of time the system should wait before starting the Warning Tone Timer 25 07 07 System Timers for DID DISA DISA Conversation Warning Tone Time Determine the length of time the system should wait before the Warning Tone is heard by DISA callers 0 64800 seconds If an outside call is tran...

Page 410: ...alls Intercom Warning Tone for Long Conversation does not occur for Intercom calls Long Conversation Cutoff Warning Tone for Long Conversation can be used with the Long Conversation Cutoff feature for outgoing calls Single Line Telephones Warning tones are not available to single line telephone SLT users Operation Warning Tone for Long Conversation is automatic if programmed Warning Tone for Long ...

Page 411: ...Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 405 Programming ...

Page 412: ...406 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual ...

Page 413: ...umerical order For example Program 10 01 is at the beginning of the section and Program 92 01 is at the end The information on each program is subdivided into the following headings Description describes what the program options control The Default Settings for each program are also included When you first install the system it uses the Default Setting for all programs Along with the Description a...

Page 414: ... the pro gramming mode at one time With telephone programming two people can program simulta neously Using the PC Program only one person is allowed in programming With the Web Program up to four people can be programming the system at once If the same program number is being defined simultaneously the last changes made to the program will be accepted To enter the programming mode 1 Go to any work...

Page 415: ...Press SPK You see Saving System Data if changes to were to the system s programming 3 The display shows Complete Data Save when completed and will exit the phone to an idle mode To save a customer s database a blank PC ATA card is required Insert the card into the NTCPU and using Program 90 03 save the software to the PC ATA card Program 90 04 is used to reload the customer data if necessary Note ...

Page 416: ...n line etc being programmed by pressing FLASH The cursor moves up to the top row of the display Pressing FLASH again moves the cursor back to the middle row LINE KEYS Use pre programmed settings to help with the program entry These settings vary between programs from LINE 1 0 off and LINE 2 1 on to preset values for timers where LINE 1 5 LINE 2 10 LINE 3 15 etc For programs with this option the li...

Page 417: ...t Key to move the cursor 5 Enter characters J L j l 5 After selecting your entry press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor 6 Enter characters M O m o 6 After selecting your entry press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor 7 Enter characters P S p p 7 After selecting your entry press the next letter or use ...

Page 418: ...an When using a display phone in programming mode you will see various Soft Key options dis played These keys will allow you to easily select scan or move through the programs _ Program Mode Base Service OP1 OP2 _ Program Mode Hard Mtnance Soft key Display Prompts If you press this Soft Key The system will back Go back one step in the program display You can press VOLUME p or VOLUME q to scroll fo...

Page 419: ...r 64 Dial Tone Detector DTMF Receiver 64 Trunk Trunk Port Number 1 1 200 Trunk Ports Total Analogue Trunks BRI Trunk Ports PRI Trunk Ports E M Analogue Trunk Ports DID Analogue Trunk Ports 200 200 200 100 2B D circuits 192 6 30 2D circuits 64 120 BRUI Logical Ports T Bus 1 200 S Bus 1 256 COIU Physical Ports Logical Ports 01 08 0 200 DIOPU Physical Ports Logical Ports 01 08 LD Trunk 0 200 OPX 0 25...

Page 420: ... System Phones Single Line Phones Analogue Devices IP System Phones 256 256 ESIU Physical Ports Logical Ports 2DCI Adapter PGD for Tone Ringer PGD for Doorbox PGD for Analogue I F PGD for ACI APR for B2 Mode 01 16 1 32 1 8 1 8 1 96 1 96 193 256 SLIU Physical Ports Logical Ports 01 16 0 256 Telephone Extension Number Range 200 499 Virtual Extension Ports 256 Virtual Extension Port Numbers 001 256 V...

Page 421: ...e Data Communication Interfaces APR Software Port Numbers 193 256 APA APR CTA or CTA Modules 192 Module Extension Number Range 200 499 Department and Pickup Groups Department Extension Group Numbers 1 64 Department Extension Group Number Range 200 499 Call Pickup Group Numbers 1 64 Hotline Internal Hotline 512 External Hotline 512 Paging and Park Internal Page Group Numbers 0 1 9 or 01 64 External...

Page 422: ...35 RTP Ports 0 65535 RTCP Ports 0 65535 H 245 Ports 0 65535 DSP Resources 01 32 H 323 Alias Addresses 1 6 Passwords User Password for setting Toll Restriction Override and Changing Class of Service using a service code 0000 Programming Passwords Level 2 IN 12345678 Level 3 SA 0000 Level 4 SB 9999 Programming Password Users 8 Footnotes 1 Count toward total number of allowed hardware ports 512 Exten...

Page 423: ...ta Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Time and Date Level Aspila EX SA Available Item No Item Input data Default Description 01 Year 00 99 No setting Enter two digits for year 00 99 02 Month 01 12 No setting Enter two digits 01 12 for the month 03 Day 01 31 No setting Enter two digits 01 31 for the day 04 Week 1 7 Sun Sat No setting Enter digit for the day of the week 1 Sunday 7 Saturday 05 H...

Page 424: ...ogram 10 01 Time and Date 1 Enter the programming mode 2 10 01 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 10 01 01 Year back select 10 02 nn nnnnn ...

Page 425: ...iting Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Caller ID Level Aspila EX SA Available Item No Item Input data Default Description 01 Country Code Dial up to 4 digits No Setting Enter the country code 02 International Access Code Dial up to 4 digits 00 Enter the international access code 03 Other Area Access Code Dial up to 2 digits 0 Enter the other area access code 04 Area Code Dial up ...

Page 426: ...Program 10 02 Location Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 10 02 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 10 02 01 Country_Code 10 02 nn nnnnn ...

Page 427: ...t edit the settings if the slot is unused install the PCB first then edit the settings Note The items highlighted in grey are read only and cannot be changed Input Data For ESIU Unit Level Aspila EX IN Available Physical Port Number 01 16 B Channel 1 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Terminal Type 0 Not set 1 Keyset DSLT 2 SLT Adapter 3 Not used 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 PGD Paging 7 PGD Tone Ringe...

Page 428: ...ule 2 APA Module 3 ADA Module 4 CTA Module 5 CTU Module 0 05 Optional Installed Unit 2 0 none 1 APR Module 2 APA Module 3 ADA Module 4 CTA Module 5 CTU Module 0 B Channel 2 Item No Item Input Data Default 06 Terminal Type 0 Not set 1 Not used 2 Not used 3 Not used 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 PGD Paging 7 PGD Tone Ringer 8 PGD Door Box 9 PGD ACI 10 Not used 11 Not used 12 APR 0 07 Logical Port Number 0...

Page 429: ...in Level S Level 1 63 15 5 15 5dB 32 0dB 04 Receive Gain Level R Level 1 63 15 5 15 5dB 32 0dB Physical Port Number 01 08 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Logical Port Number 0 200 0 Physical Port Number 01 08 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Logical Port Number 0 200 0 02 2 4Wire 0 2Wire 1 4Wire 1 Physical Port Number 01 08 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 LD OPX assignment 0 LD Trunk 1 OPX...

Page 430: ...1 02 Logical Port Number see Note 1 0 Net set 1 For Trunk mode 1 200 2 For S Bus 1 256 0 03 Connection Type 0 P MP 1 P P 0 04 Layer 3 Timer Type see Note 2 1 5 1 05 Not Currently Used CLIP Information Announcement 0 disable 1 enable 1 06 Connection Bus Mode S point only 0 Extended Passive Bus 1 Short Passive Bus 0 07 S point DID digits 0 4 0 08 Dial sending Mode 0 Enblock sending 1 Overlap sending...

Page 431: ...s 1 256 0 03 CRC Multi frame CRC4 Only E1 30B D Mode 0 off 1 on 0 04 Layer 3 Timer Type 1 5 1 05 Not Currently Used CLIP Information Announcement 0 disable 1 enable 1 06 Length of a cable 0 0 40m 1 40 81m 2 81 122m 3 122 162m 4 162 200m 0 07 S point DID digits 0 4 0 08 Dial Sending Mode 0 Enblock Sending 1 Overlap Sending 1 09 Dial Information Element Only for Overlap Sending Mode 0 Keypad Facilit...

Page 432: ...81 06 Trunk mode and Program 82 06 S Bus For VOIPU Unit 13 Loss Of Signal detection limit In short haul mode 0 0 91V 1 0 74V 2 0 59V 3 0 42V 4 0 32V 5 0 21V 6 0 16V 7 0 10V In long haul mode 0 1 70V 1 0 84V 2 0 84V 3 0 45V 4 0 45V 5 0 20V 6 0 10V 7 not defined 0 14 Service Protocol for S Point 0 Keypad Facility 1 Specified Protocol for Aspila EX System 0 Physical Port Number 01 32 Item No Item Inp...

Page 433: ...fine it or redefine the type manually Feature Cross Reference None Physical Port Number 01 32 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Logical Port Number 0 200 0 02 Frame Type Setup 01 D4 12 Multi Frame 02 ESF 24 Multi Frame 01 03 Zero Code Suppression Setup ZCS_B8ZS 01 B8ZS 02 AMI ZCS 01 04 DTI CSU Distance Setup 01 0 feet 133 feet 02 133 feet 266 feet 03 266 feet 399feet 04 399 feet 533 feet 05 533 f...

Page 434: ...number to be programmed by pressing the VOLUMEq or VOLUME q keys Or press FLASH once to select the slot number or press FLASH twice to select a port num ber Enter the slot or port number 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 10 02 01 Sl...

Page 435: ...el Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Input Data Default Description 01 Music on Hold Source Selection 0 Internal source 1 External source 0 The Music on Hold MOH source can be internal synthe sized or from a customer pro vided music source The customer provided source can connect to a 2PGDAD or the connector on the NTCPU Trunk MOH and Extension MOH music source use the same Music on Hold source ...

Page 436: ...4 Music on Hold Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 10 04 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 10 04 01 Hold_Tone_Set 0 Internal back select 10 04 nn nnnnn ...

Page 437: ... General Purpose Relay Setup to define which Relay circuits 5 8 on 2PGDAD Adapter are used for General Purpose Relay Input Data INDEX 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Music on Hold Level Aspila EX IN Available General Purpose Relay No 1 8 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Slot No Physical Port of ESIU Sensor circuit No Slot No 0 16 ESIU Port 0 16 Relay No 0 5 8 0 0 0 ...

Page 438: ...10 05 General Purpose Relay Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 10 05 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 10 06 01 Relay No1 Slot No back select 10 05 nn nnnnn ...

Page 439: ...Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 06 ISDN BRI Setup Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 433 10 06 ISDN BRI Setup Description This program is not currently used Level Aspila EX IN Available ...

Page 440: ...g Note Even if this program is set to 0 the telephone conversation recording function can be used In this case 64 32 x 2 circuits will be shared by conference recording and conversation recording The number of the conference circuits occupied by a conversation recording is two Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Call Distribution ACD Conference Level Aspila EX IN Available...

Page 441: ... 10 07 Conversation Record Circuits 1 Enter the programming mode 2 10 07 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 10 07 01 No of Record 0 back select 10 07 nn nnnnn ...

Page 442: ... pre ringing a burst of ringing occurs as soon as the trunk s LED flashes The call then continues ringing with the normal ring cadence cycle Without pre ringing the call starts ringing only when the normal ring cadence cycle occurs This may cause a ring delay depending on when call detection occurs in reference to the ring cycle Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Central Office Cal...

Page 443: ... 08 Pre Ringing Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 10 08 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 10 08 01 Pre ringing 1 Yes back select 10 08 nn nnnnn 1 1 ...

Page 444: ...he system can provide a total of 64 circuits 32 32 These are used as follows Extension DTMF receiver for SLT Trunk DTMF receiver for analogue trunks dial tone busy tone detec tion for analogue trunks Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Central Office Calls Placing Direct Inward Dialing DID Direct Inward System Access DISA Tie Lines Level Aspila EX IN Available Circuit Resource Numbe...

Page 445: ...mode 2 10 09 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select a circuit resource number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 10 09 01 Rsouce1 DTMF DT_De...

Page 446: ...255 255 0 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 252 192 0 0 0 248 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 255 224 0 0 255 254 0 0 255 255 192 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 254 224 0 0 0 252 0 0 0 255 128 0 0 255 248 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 224 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 255 255 255 0 0 The setting of Sub net Mask is mistaken when all Host Address are 0 If the network s...

Page 447: ...0 12 NTCPU Network Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 10 12 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 10 12 01 IP_Add 172 16 0 10 back select 10 12 nn nnnnn ...

Page 448: ...l Aspila EX SA Available Item No Item Input Data Default Description 01 DHCP Server Mode 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 Enable or disable the use of the built in DHCP Server 02 Lease time Days 0 255 0 day Lease Time of the IP address to a client Hour 0 23 0 hour Minutes 1 59 30 minutes 03 Not used 04 Number of networks 0 Single 1 Divide same network 0 The number of networks to manage With a single network...

Page 449: ...0 13 In DHCP Server Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 10 13 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 10 13 01 DCHP Serv_Mode0 Off back select 10 13 nn nnnnn ...

Page 450: ...ly one scope range can be entered When Divide Same Network is selected in 10 13 04 a maximum of ten scope ranges can be entered 10 13 04 Maximum 1 0 0 1126 255 255 254 128 1 0 1191 254 255 254 192 0 1 1223 255 254 254 172 16 5 254 Scope 2 Minimum 1 0 0 1126 255 255 254 128 1 0 1191 254 255 254 192 0 1 1223 255 254 254 0 0 0 0 10 13 04 Maximum 1 0 0 1126 255 255 254 128 1 0 1191 254 255 254 192 0 1...

Page 451: ...92 0 1 1223 255 254 254 0 0 0 0 Scope 7 Minimum 1 0 0 1126 255 255 254 128 1 0 1191 254 255 254 192 0 1 1223 255 254 254 0 0 0 0 10 13 04 Maximum 1 0 0 1126 255 255 254 128 1 0 1191 254 255 254 192 0 1 1223 255 254 254 0 0 0 0 Scope 8 Minimum 1 0 0 1126 255 255 254 128 1 0 1191 254 255 254 192 0 1 1223 255 254 254 0 0 0 0 10 13 04 Maximum 1 0 0 1126 255 255 254 128 1 0 1191 254 255 254 192 0 1 122...

Page 452: ...mmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section Scope 10 Minimum 1 0 0 1126 255 255 254 128 1 0 1191 254 255 254 192 0 1 1223 255 254 254 0 0 0 0 10 13 04 Maximum 1 0 0 1126 255 255 254 ...

Page 453: ...IP address should be assigned out of the scope range set up in Program 10 14 IP address 1 0 0 1126 255 255 254 128 1 0 1191 254 255 254 192 0 1 1223 255 254 254 0 0 0 0 Client 2 MAC 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 IP address 1 0 0 1126 255 255 254 128 1 0 1191 254 255 254 192 0 1 1223 255 254 254 0 0 0 0 Client 3 MAC 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 IP ad...

Page 454: ...0 Client 7 MAC 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 IP address 1 0 0 1126 255 255 254 128 1 0 1191 254 255 254 192 0 1 1223 255 254 254 0 0 0 0 Client 8 MAC 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 IP address 1 0 0 1126 255 255 254 128 1 0 1191 254 255 254 192 0 1 1223 255 254 254 0 0 0 0 Client 9 MAC 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 IP address 1 ...

Page 455: ...ode 2 10 15 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the client number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 10 15 01 Client1 MAC 00 00 00 00 00 ...

Page 456: ...1126 255 255 254 128 1 0 1191 254 255 254 192 0 1 1223 255 254 254 0 0 0 0 02 DNS Server Code number 0 255 6 Fixed IP address 1 0 0 1126 255 255 254 128 1 0 1191 254 255 254 192 0 1 1223 255 254 254 0 0 0 0 03 TFTP Server Code number 0 255 66 Fixed IP address 1 0 0 1126 255 255 254 128 1 0 1191 254 255 254 192 0 1 1223 255 254 254 0 0 0 0 04 DRS Code number 0 255 161 Fixed IP address 1 0 0 1126 25...

Page 457: ...ta for Program 10 16 Option Information Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 10 16 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 10 16 01 Router_Code_No3 back select 10 16 nn nnnnn ...

Page 458: ... A gatekeeper is not used Automatic A gatekeeper is searched and assigned Manual A gatekeeper s IP address is assigned 02 Gatekeeper IP address IP address 1 0 0 1126 255 255 254 128 1 0 1191 254 255 254 192 0 1 1223 255 254 254 0 0 0 0 Unicast IP address of the External GK This item is effective only when Program 10 17 01 is set to Manual 2 03 Not used 04 Preferred Gatekeeper Character line Max 12...

Page 459: ... 10 17 H 323 Gatekeeper Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 10 17 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 10 17 01 GK_Mode 0 None back select 10 17 nn nnnnn ...

Page 460: ...able The number of alias 1 6 Item No Item Input Data Default Description 01 Alias Address Maximum 12 digits No setup Define the Alias Address of the Aspila EX system registered into the External Gatekeeper At this time it is only the telephone number which can be registered as an Alias Address In the future other types of addresses will be available 02 Type of Alias Address 0 E164 0 Define the typ...

Page 461: ...10 18 H 323 alia Address Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 10 18 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 10 18 01 Alias 1 Alias_Add back select 10 18 nn nnnnn ...

Page 462: ...cription Use Program 10 19 VoIPU DSP Resource Selection to specify the operating mode of the DSP resource on the VoIPU PCB Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference VoIP Level Aspila EX IN Available SLOT Number 01 16 DSP resource number Input Data Default 01 32 0 common use for both IP extensions and trunks 1 IP extension only 2 IP trunk only 0 ...

Page 463: ...g mode 2 10 19 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the slot number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 10 19 01 Slot No 1 DSP01_Oper Mode0...

Page 464: ...ram 10 20 LAN Setup for External Equipment to define the TCP port address etc for communicating to external equipment Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Level Aspila EX IN Available Type of external equipment 1 CTI Server 2 ACD MIS 3 Reserve 4 Reserve 5 Reserve Item No Item Input Data Default 01 TCP Port 0 65535 0 02 Not used 03 Keep alive time 1 255 Sec 30 ...

Page 465: ...rogramming mode 2 10 20 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the device number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 10 20 01 Ex Device1 TCP_...

Page 466: ... control on NTCPU Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Input Data Default Description 01 External Source Con trol Switch Selection on NTCPU 0 External MOH source 1 BGM source 2 External Speaker 3 General Purpose Relay 0 Specify the function of the relay switch for external tone source control 02 Baud rate for COM Port 0 4800 1 9600 2 192...

Page 467: ... 10 02 Location Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 10 02 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 10 21 01 NTCPU_Control 0 Hold back select 10 21 nn nnnnn ...

Page 468: ...to start the APSU unit server from a key telephone Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Level Aspila EX SA Available SLOT Number 01 16 Item No Item Input Data Default Description Related Program 01 Server MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 Set up MAC address for the APSU unit server 11 15 06 02 Broadcast address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 Set ...

Page 469: ...ming mode 2 10 22 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the slot number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 10 22 01 Slot No 1 S V_MAC00 00 ...

Page 470: ...ram is activated when Program 10 17 01 and 10 18 are registered Up to 50 systems can be registered Input Data Index 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Level Aspila EX SA Available System Number 01 50 Item No Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 System Interconnection 0 No 1 Yes 0 02 IP address 1 0 0 1_126 255 255 254 128 1 0 1 _191 254 255 254 192 0 1 1 _223 255 254 254 0 0 0 0 A...

Page 471: ...ng mode 2 10 23 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the slot number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 10 23 01 System No 1 Networking_Se...

Page 472: ...put Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Time and Date Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 Daylight Savings Mode 0 Off 1 On 0 02 Time for Daylight Savings 0000 23599 0200 03 Start of Month Summer Time 1 12 4 04 Start of Week 0 Last Week 1 5 1 05 Start of Week Day 1 7 Sun 1 Mon 2 etc 1 06 End of Month 1 12 10 07 End of Week 0 Last Week 1 5 0 08 En...

Page 473: ...nter the programming mode 2 Enter the number of the item you want to program 3 Select a circuit resource number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 10 24 nn nnnnn...

Page 474: ...x Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 10 25 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select a circuit resource number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming sec...

Page 475: ...ation Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 10 26 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select a circuit resource number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming...

Page 476: ... 10 27 IP System ID to set the IP address of the IP system Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Level Aspila EX IN Available System ID 01 50 Item No Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 IP Address 1 0 0 1_126 255 255 254 128 1 0 1 _191 254 255 254 192 0 1 1 _223 255 254 254 0 0 0 0 02 Call Procedure Port 1 65535 1730 ...

Page 477: ...Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select a circuit resource number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 10 27 01 SysID1 IP Add 0 0 0 0 back select...

Page 478: ...ing with that digit For example entering 6 affects all number plan entries beginning with 6 The entries you make in step 2 and step 3 below affect the entire range of numbers beginning with 6 For example if you enter 3 in step 2 the entries affected would be 600 699 If you enter 4 in step 2 below the entries affected would be 6000 6999 l Entering two digits lets you define codes based on the first...

Page 479: ...ow your sys tem operates Assume for example the site is a hotel that has room numbers from 100 399 In order to make extension numbers correspond to room numbers you should In Program 11 02 reassign extension numbers on each floor from 100 to 399 Other applications might also require you to change entries in Program 11 10 through 11 16 Default See the following tables Dial Types Dial Type Descripti...

Page 480: ...on Number 3 Trunk Access 4 Special Trunk Access 5 Operator Access 6 Flexible Routing 0 Not Used Dialed Number Number of Digits Required Default New Dial Type Default New 1X 3 1 11 0 0 12 0 0 13 0 0 14 0 0 15 0 0 16 0 0 17 0 0 18 0 0 19 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 2X 3 2 21 0 0 22 0 0 23 0 0 24 0 0 25 0 0 26 0 0 27 0 0 28 0 0 29 0 0 20 0 0 2 0 0 2 0 0 ...

Page 481: ...on Number 3 Trunk Access 4 Special Trunk Access 5 Operator Access 6 Flexible Routing 0 Not Used Dialed Number Number of Digits Required Default New Dial Type Default New 3X 3 2 31 0 0 32 0 0 33 0 0 34 0 0 35 0 0 36 0 0 37 0 0 38 0 0 39 0 0 30 0 0 3 0 0 3 0 0 4X 3 2 41 0 0 42 0 0 43 0 0 44 0 0 45 0 0 46 0 0 47 0 0 48 0 0 49 0 0 40 0 0 4 0 0 4 0 0 ...

Page 482: ...on Number 3 Trunk Access 4 Special Trunk Access 5 Operator Access 6 Flexible Routing 0 Not Used Dialed Number Number of Digits Required Default New Dial Type Default New 5X 3 2 51 0 0 52 0 0 53 0 0 54 0 0 55 0 0 56 0 0 57 0 0 58 0 0 59 0 0 50 0 0 5 0 0 5 0 0 6X 3 2 61 0 0 62 0 0 63 0 0 64 0 0 65 0 0 66 0 0 67 0 0 68 0 0 69 0 0 60 0 0 6 0 0 6 0 0 ...

Page 483: ...on Number 3 Trunk Access 4 Special Trunk Access 5 Operator Access 6 Flexible Routing 0 Not Used Dialed Number Number of Digits Required Default New Dial Type Default New 7X 3 1 71 0 0 72 0 0 73 0 0 74 0 0 75 0 0 76 0 0 77 0 0 78 0 0 79 0 0 70 0 0 7 0 0 7 0 0 8X 3 1 81 0 0 82 0 0 83 0 0 84 0 0 85 0 0 86 0 0 87 0 0 88 0 0 89 0 0 80 0 0 8 0 0 8 0 0 ...

Page 484: ...on Number 3 Trunk Access 4 Special Trunk Access 5 Operator Access 6 Flexible Routing 0 Not Used Dialed Number Number of Digits Required Default New Dial Type Default New 9X 3 3 91 0 0 92 0 0 93 0 0 94 0 0 95 0 0 96 0 0 97 0 0 98 0 0 99 0 0 90 0 0 9 0 0 9 0 0 0X 1 5 01 0 0 02 0 0 03 0 0 04 0 0 05 0 0 06 0 0 07 0 0 08 0 0 09 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ...

Page 485: ... Code 2 Extension Number 3 Trunk Access 4 Special Trunk Access 5 Operator Access 6 Flexible Routing 0 Not Used Dialed Number Number of Digits Required Default New Dial Type Default New X 4 1 1 0 0 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 0 0 5 0 0 6 0 0 7 0 0 8 0 0 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 4 1 1 0 0 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 0 0 5 0 0 6 0 0 7 0 0 8 0 0 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ...

Page 486: ...g 1 Enter the programming mode 2 11 01 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the dial number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 11 01 01 Di...

Page 487: ... 11 01 This lets an employee move to a new location port and retain the same extension number Input Data Default Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Department Calling Flexible System Numbering Intercom Level Aspila EX IN Available Extension Port Number 001 512 Extension Number Description Dial Up to 8 digits Set up extension numbers for Key Telephones Single Line Telephones Including 1SLIA AP...

Page 488: ... the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the extension port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 11 02 01 Extn Port1 Extension_No 200 back selec...

Page 489: ...ong The first second digit p of the number should be assigned in Program 11 01 Input Data Default Virtual Extension Numbers 1 256 No setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Flexible System Numbering Multiple Directory Numbers Call Coverage Level Aspila EX IN Available Virtual Extension Port Number 001 256 Virtual Extension Number Description Dial Up to 8 digits Set up Virtual Extension Num...

Page 490: ...1 04 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the virtual port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 11 04 01 V Port 1 Virtual_Ext_No back...

Page 491: ...st second digit p of the number should be assigned in Program 11 01 Input Data Default ACI Port Numbers 1 96 have no extension number set Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Analogue Communications Interface ACI Flexible System Numbering Level Aspila EX IN Available ACI Port Number 01 96 ACI Extension Number Description Related Program Dial Up to 8 digits The extension number cannot be dupli c...

Page 492: ... 06 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the ACI port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 11 06 01 ACI Port1 ACI_Ext_No back select ...

Page 493: ...uld be assigned in Program 11 01 as type 2 Input Data Default Group Numbers 01 64 No setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Department Calling Department Step Calling Level Aspila EX IN Available Department Extension Group Number 01 64 Extension Group Pilot Number Description Related Program Dial Up to 8 digits Use this program to assign department group pilot numbers The number set up by...

Page 494: ... 07 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL UME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 11 07 01 TEL Group1 Pilot_Call_No ...

Page 495: ... be up to four digits long The first second digit p of the number should be assigned in Program 11 01 as type 2 Input Data Default Group Numbers 01 16 have no pilot numbers defined Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Analogue Communications Interface ACI Level Aspila EX IN Available ACI Group Number 01 16 ACI Group Pilot Number Description Related Program Dial Up to 8 digits The extension numb...

Page 496: ...3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the ACI group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 11 08 01 ACI Group1 ACI_Pilot_No back select ...

Page 497: ...he Number of Digits Required set to 1 If you change the trunk access code in Program 11 09 you must make the corresponding changes in Program 11 01 Item No Item Input Data Default Description Related Program 01 Trunk Access Code Dial Up to 4 digits 9 Use this program to assign the trunk access code normally 9 This is the code extension users dial to access Auto matic Route Selection 11 01 System N...

Page 498: ...Trunk Access Code 1 Enter the programming mode 2 11 09 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 11 09 01 Trunk_Access_Code0 back select 11 09 nn nnnnn ...

Page 499: ...y be affected with the changing the code If you change a Service Code be sure to record your entry in the New column Input Data Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Terminals Default New Related Program 01 Day Night Mode Switching KTS SLT 818 12 xx 20 07 01 02 Changing the Music on Hold Tone KTS 881 10 04 03 Setting the System Time KTS 828 04 Storing Common Abbreviated Dialing Numbers KTS 853...

Page 500: ... 822 13 05 19 Not Used 20 VRS Record Erase Message KTS 716 20 07 13 21 VRS General Message Playback KTS 711 20 07 14 22 VRS Record or Erase General Message KTS 712 20 07 15 23 SMDR Extension Accumulated Printout Code KTS 721 20 07 18 24 SMDR Group Accumulated Printout Code KTS 722 20 07 19 25 Account Code Accumulated Printout Code KTS 723 20 07 20 26 Forced Trunk Disconnect KTS SLT 724 20 07 11 27...

Page 501: ... Service Code Setup for System Administrator 1 Enter the programming mode 2 11 10 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 11 10 01 NT Mode_Switch 01 back select 11 10 nn nnnnn ...

Page 502: ...d Music Programs that may be affected with the changing the code If you change a Service Code be sure to record your entry in the New column Input Data Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Terminals Default New Related Program 01 Call Forward Immediate KTS SLT 848 02 Call Forward Busy KTS SLT 843 03 Call Forward No Answer KTS SLT 845 04 Call Forward Busy No Answer KTS SLT 844 05 Call Forward ...

Page 503: ...13 28 25 Automatic Transfer Setup for Each Extension Group KTS SLT 702 20 11 17 24 05 26 Automatic Transfer Cancellation for Each Extension Group KTS SLT 703 27 Destination of Automatic Transfer Each Extension Group KTS 704 20 11 17 24 05 28 Delayed Transfer for Every Extension Group KTS SLT 705 20 11 17 24 05 24 02 08 29 Delayed Transfer Cancellation for Each Extension Group KTS SLT 706 20 11 17 ...

Page 504: ...peration 1 Enter the programming mode 2 11 11 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 39 One Touch Dial Number Entry KTS 855 40 Off Premise Call Forwarding KTS SLT 713 11 11 01 Call_Forwa...

Page 505: ...hange a Service Code be sure to record your entry in the New column Input Data Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Terminals Default New Related Program 01 Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Override Activating Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Override This code is only available if you disable the voice mail Single Digit dialing code in Program 11 16 09 KTS SLT 807 11 16 09 02 Conference KTS SLT ...

Page 506: ...ll Pickup Own Group KTS SLT 856 26 Call Pickup for Specified Group KTS SLT 868 27 Call Pickup KTS SLT 867 28 Call Pickup for Another Group KTS SLT 869 29 Direct Extension Call Pickup KTS SLT 815 30 Specified Trunk Answer KTS SLT 772 31 Park KTS SLT 831 24 03 32 Answer for Park KTS SLT 861 24 03 33 Group Hold KTS SLT 832 34 Answer for Group Hold KTS SLT 862 35 Extension Park KTS SLT 773 36 Door Box...

Page 507: ...witching between calls SLT 894 11 12 03 48 Account Code SLT 891 49 Not Used 50 General Purpose Relay KST 880 51 Call Own Mailbox 717 52 Live Monitoring VRS 725 53 Live Recording at SLT SLT 754 54 VRS Routing for ANI DNIS Setting Up ANI DNIS Routing to the VRS Auto mated Attendant Using the Transfer feature this also allows a call to be transferred to the VRS 882 56 E911 Alarm Shut Off Enter the Se...

Page 508: ...2 Service Code Setup for Service Access 1 Enter the programming mode 2 11 12 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 11 12 01 Bypass_Call 801 back select 11 12 nn nnnnn ...

Page 509: ...try If you change a Service Code be sure to record your entry in the New column Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Call Distribution ACD Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Terminals Default New 01 ACD Log In Log Out for KTS KTS SLT 839 02 ACD Log Out for SLT SLT 755 03 Set ACD Temporary Release for SLT SLT 756 04 Cancel ACD Temporary Release for SLT SLT 757 05 Set ...

Page 510: ... Service Code Setup for ACD 1 Enter the programming mode 2 11 13 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 11 13 01 KT_ACD_LogIn Out back select 11 13 nn nnnnn ...

Page 511: ...ault entry If you change a Service Code be sure to record your entry in the New column Input Data Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Terminals Default 01 Set DND for Own Extension KTS SLT 727 02 Cancel DND for Own Extension KTS SLT 728 03 Set DND for Other Extension KTS SLT 729 04 Cancel DND for Other Extension KTS SLT 730 05 Set Wake Up Call for Own Extension KTS SLT 731 06 Cancel Wake Up ...

Page 512: ...Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 15 Room Status Change for Other Extension KTS SLT 741 16 Room Status Output KTS SLT 742 17 Hotel Room Monitor KTS SLT 770 18 Hotel PMS Toll Restricti...

Page 513: ...nes can use the Service Code The code s default entry Programs that may be affected with the changing the code If you change a Service Code be sure to record your entry in the New column Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Hotel Motel Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Terminals Default New Related Program 01 Remote Maintenance 830 02 ACD Access in Dial In Conversion Table 86...

Page 514: ...11 15 Service Code Setup Administrative for Hotel 1 Enter the programming mode 2 11 15 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 11 15 01 Remote_Mainte 01 back select 11 15 nn nnnnn ...

Page 515: ... example dialing 1 code 03 when calling an extension will switch the call from either a voice or signal call depending on how it s currently defined Programs that may be affected by changing these codes If you change a Service Code be sure to record your entry in the New column Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Refer to chart above Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Default...

Page 516: ...1 16 Single Digit Service Code Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 11 16 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 11 16 01 Step Call back select 11 16 nn nnnnn ...

Page 517: ...ilot Number to assign the ACD Master Number for each ACD Group This is the number users dial to transfer calls to the ACD Group Input Data Default No ACD Group Pilot Numbers assigned to any ACD Group 1 64 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Call Distribution ACD Level Aspila EX IN Available ACD Group Number 01 64 ACD Group Pilot Number Dial Up to 8 digits ...

Page 518: ... Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the ACD group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 11 17 01 ACD Group1 ACD G_Pilot_No back select...

Page 519: ...ture Cross Reference Night Service Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Input Data Default Description Related Program 01 Manual Night Service Enable 0 off 1 on 1 Allows prevents users from activating Night Service by dialing a service code 11 10 01 02 Automatic Night Service 0 off 1 on 1 According to a preset schedule enable or disable Automatic Night Service for the system 12 02 12 03 12 04...

Page 520: ...Night Mode Function Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 12 01 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 12 01 01 Manual_NT Mode1 On back select 12 01 nn nnnnn ...

Page 521: ...ime Pattern 2 Level Aspila EX SA Available Night Mode Service Group Number 01 32 Time Pattern Number 01 10 Set Time Number 01 20 Timer Number Start Time End Time Operation Mode 01 20 0000 2359 0000 2359 1 8 0 00 9 00 12 00 13 00 17 00 18 00 22 00 0 00 Mode 3 Mode 1 Mode 4 Mode 1 Mode 4 Mode 2 Mode 3 midnight day rest day rest night midnight Time setting 01 00 00 to 09 00 Mode 3 midnight Time setti...

Page 522: ...e Pattern 1 Time Pattern 2 Time Pattern 3 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Night Service Set Time Number Start Time End Time Mode 01 0000 0800 2 02 0800 1700 1 03 1700 0000 2 04 0000 0000 1 20 0000 0000 1 Set Time Number Start Time End Time Mode 01 0000 0000 2 02 0000 0000 1 20 0000 0000 1 Set Time Number Start Time End Time Mode 01 0000 0000 1 20 0000 0000 1 ...

Page 523: ...utomatic Night Service Patterns 1 Enter the programming mode 2 12 02 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 12 02 01 PTTN 01 01 STRT 00 00 back select 12 02 nn nnnnn ...

Page 524: ...ine a weekly schedule of night switch settings Input Data Default Conditions None Level Aspila EX SA Available Night Mode Service Group Number 01 32 Day of the week Time Schedule Pattern Number 01 Sunday 0 10 02 Monday 03 Tuesday 04 Wednesday 05 Thursday 06 Friday 07 Saturday Day of the week Time Schedule Pattern Number 01 Sunday 2 02 Monday 1 03 Tuesday 1 04 Wednesday 1 05 Thursday 1 06 Friday 1 ...

Page 525: ...structions To enter data for Program 12 03 Weekly Night Serv ice Switching 1 Enter the programming mode 2 Enter the number of the item you want to program 3 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 4 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 12 03 nn nnnnn ...

Page 526: ...fine a yearly schedule of holiday night switch settings This schedule is used for setting of special days which the company is expected to be closed such as national holiday Input Data Default No setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Night Service Level Aspila EX SA Available Night Mode Service Group Number 01 32 Days and Months Time Pattern Number 0101 1231 ex 0101 Jan 1 1231 Dec 31 0 3...

Page 527: ...4 Holiday Night Service Switching 1 Enter the programming mode 2 12 04 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 12 04 01 Date01 01 PTTN0 back select 12 04 nn nnnnn ...

Page 528: ... Assignment for Extensions Description Use Program 12 05 Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions to a assign Day Night Mode Group for each extension Input Data Default No setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Night Service Level Aspila EX IN Available Extension Number Max 8 Digits Night Mode Service Group Number Default 01 32 1 ...

Page 529: ...ht Mode Group Assignment for Extensions 1 Enter the programming mode 2 12 05 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 12 05 01 TEL200 Night Mode Group 1 back select 12 05 nn nnnnn ...

Page 530: ...Group Assignment for Trunks Description Use Program 12 06 Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks to assign a Day Night Mode Group for each trunk port Input Data Default No setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Night Service Level Aspila EX IN Available Trunk Port Number 1 200 Night Mode Service Group Number Default 01 32 1 ...

Page 531: ... Mode Group Assignment for Trunks 1 Enter the programming mode 2 12 06 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 12 06 01 Trk Port 1 Night Mode Group 1 back select 12 06 nn nnnnn ...

Page 532: ...xt Data for Night Mode to make an original text message which is dis played on an LCD of keyset telephone in each Night Mode Input Data Default No setting for modes 1 8 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Night Service Level Aspila EX IN Available Night Mode Service Group Number 01 32 Day Night Mode 1 8 Text Message Maximum 12 characters alphabetic or numeric ...

Page 533: ...xt Data for Night Mode 1 Enter the programming mode 2 12 07 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 12 07 01 Mode Group1 Mode1 Text back select 12 07 nn nnnnn ...

Page 534: ...Function Setup to define the Abbreviated Dialing functions Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Abbreviated Dialing Level Aspila EX SA Available Item No Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 Abbreviated Dialing Auto Outgoing Call Mode 0 Trunk outgoing mode 1 Extension outgoing mode 0 13 05 02 Not Used 03 Number of Common Abbreviated Dialing Bins 0 2000 0 No Common Abbrevi ated D...

Page 535: ... Abbreviated Dialing Function Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 13 01 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 13 01 01 Abb Dial 0 Trunk OTG back select 13 01 nn nnnnn ...

Page 536: ...p Abbreviated Dialing Bins to define the range of bin numbers to be used by each Abbreviated Dialing group refer to Program 13 03 Input Data Default No setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Abbreviated Dialing Level Aspila EX IN Available Abbreviated Dialing Group Number Start Address of Abbreviated Dialing Bin End Address of Abbreviated Dialing Bin 01 64 0 1990 0 9 1999 ...

Page 537: ...Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Abbreviated Dialing group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 13 02 01 Abb Group 1 Group Star...

Page 538: ...ted Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions Description Use Program 13 03 Abbreviated Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions to assign Abbre viated Dialing Group for each extension Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Abbreviated Dialing Level Aspila EX IN Available Extension Number Up to 8 digits Group Number Default Value 1 64 1 ...

Page 539: ... 1 Enter the programming mode 2 13 03 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the extension number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 13 03 0...

Page 540: ... Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Abbreviated Dialing Level Aspila EX SB Available Abbreviated Dialing Bin Number 0 1999 Item No Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 Abbreviated Dialing Data 1 9 0 Pause Press line key 1 Recall Flash Press line key 2 for Additional Digit for ISDN Functionality Press line key 3 max 24 digits No Setting 02 Name Max 12 Characters No Setting 03 Transf...

Page 541: ...mode 2 13 04 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Abbreviated Dialing group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 13 04 01 Abb Are...

Page 542: ...eviated Dialing number refer to Program 13 05 If this program has an entry of 0 no setting then seizing a line follows the trunk access group routing of the caller s extension refer to Program 14 06 This setting is only available in External Abbreviated Dialing Mode Program 13 01 01 Input Data Default No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Abbreviated Dialing Level Aspila EX SB Availab...

Page 543: ...05 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Abbreviated Dialing Area number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 13 05 01 ABB Area0 TRK GP N...

Page 544: ...Program 13 Abbreviated Dialing 13 06 538 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual 13 06 Description Not Used Level Aspila EX SB Available ...

Page 545: ...lification for the trunk you are programming 1 63 15 5 15 5dB in 5dB intervals 26 3dB 03 Receive CODEC Gain Type Use this option to select the CODEC gain for the trunk The option sets the amount of gain signal amplification for the trunk you are programming 1 63 15 5 15 5dB in 5dB intervals 26 3dB 04 Transmit Gain Level for Conference and Transfer Calls Use this option to select the CODEC gain typ...

Page 546: ...le 1 or disable 0 loop supervision for the trunk This option is required for Call Forwarding Off Premise and Tandem Trunking only 0 disable 1 enable 0 14 Long Conversation Cutoff Use this option to enable or disable the Long Conversation Cutoff feature for each trunk 0 disable 1 enable 0 20 21 03 20 21 04 15 Long Conversation Alarm Before Cut Off Use this option to enable or disable the Long Conve...

Page 547: ... automatically blocking outgoing Caller ID information when a user places a call If allowed i e block enabled the system automatically inserts the Caller ID block code defined in 14 01 21 before the user dialed digits 0 Allow 1 Block 0 21 Caller ID Block Code Enter the code up to 8 digits that should be used as the Caller ID Block Code This code is automatically inserted before dialed digits if Pr...

Page 548: ... 01 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 14 01 01 Trunk1 TRK Name LINE 001 back select...

Page 549: ...tect or Immediate Ring Defect for the trunk 0 Normal delayed 1 Immediately ringing 0 03 Flash Types This option to select the flash type open loop flash or ground Always set this option for open loop flash 0 Open Loop Flash 1 Ground 0 04 Flash For Timed Flash or Disconnect This option lets you use Flash for Timed Flash Pro gram 81 01 14 or Disconnect Program 81 01 15 A user implements Flash by pre...

Page 550: ...ialing Manual User can dial to switch a DP trunk to DTMF dial ing 0 Automatic 1 Automatic and Manual 2 Manual 2 21 01 03 08 Answering condition 0 Polarity reversing 1 Polarity reversing or timer 0 21 01 03 09 Busy Tone Detection 0 disable 1 enable 0 10 Caller ID Enable or disable a trunk s ability to receive Caller ID information 0 disable 1 enable 0 11 Next Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone Use thi...

Page 551: ...rogramming mode 2 14 02 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 14 02 01 Trunk1 DP DTMF 2...

Page 552: ...ehind PBX Setup to indicate if the trunk is installed behind a PBX There is one item for each of the Night Service Modes Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Central Office Calls Placing Level Aspila EX IN Available Trunk port number 1 200 Day Night Mode Type of Connection Default Related Program 1 8 0 Stand alone 1 Behind PBX 0 22 02 ...

Page 553: ...ter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 14 04 01 Trunk1 Mode1 LN Type 0 Trunk back select 14 ...

Page 554: ...an also assign the outbound priority for trunks within the group When users dial up the trunk group they seize the trunks in the order you specify in the outbound priority entry Input Data Default Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Trunk Groups Level Aspila EX IN Available Trunk Port Number 001 200 Trunk Group Number Order Number 0 100 1 200 Trunk Port Group Priority 1 1 1 200 1 200 ...

Page 555: ...nter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 14 05 01 Trunk1 Group No 1 back select 14 05 nn Trun...

Page 556: ...ccess Input Data Level Aspila EX IN Available Example for setting With less than 4 trunk groups Route number 1 Order 1 Trunk group 1 Order 2 Trunk group 2 For the above setting if all the lines in trunk group 1 are busy the system searches for an idle line in trunk group 2 With more than 4 trunk groups Route number 1 Order 1 Trunk group 1 Order 2 Trunk group 2 Order 3 Trunk group 3 Order 4 1002 Ju...

Page 557: ...ter data for Program 14 06 Trunk Group Routing 1 Enter the programming mode 2 14 06 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Trunk Group Routing Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG...

Page 558: ...xtensions Each trunk can have one of eight access options for each Access Map Input Data Default Access Map 1 Trunk Ports 1 200 assigned with option 7 access incoming and outgoing access and access when trunk is on Hold Access Maps 2 200 Trunk Ports 1 200 assigned with option 0 access no access Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing Leve...

Page 559: ...r the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Access Map number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 14 07 01 Acess Map1 TRK_ 001 7 OTG INC Hold back s...

Page 560: ...elected as the source in Item 1 the port number for the source must be selected in Item 2 Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Music on Hold Level Aspila EX IN Available Trunk Port Number 001 200 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 MOH Type Select a trunk s Music on Hold source 0 Internal synthesized MOH 1 A customer provided source connected to BGM port 2 A customer provided source c...

Page 561: ...ode 2 14 08 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 14 08 01 Trunk1 MOH Type 0 Internal b...

Page 562: ... each trunk Note If both Programs 14 09 and 15 12 define a destination the destination in Program 15 12 will be followed Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Mail Level Aspila EX IN Available Trunk Port Number 001 200 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Recording Destination Extension Number Max 8 digits No setting 02 Automatic Recording 0 off 1 on 0 03 Recording Contents Storin...

Page 563: ...the programming mode 2 14 09 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 14 09 01 Trunk1 Rec ...

Page 564: ...lure Telephone for Trunks to set up the outside trunk port which will be used if a power failure occurs The extension number of the telephone linked to outside line at the time of a power failure is also deteremined Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Level Aspila EX IN Not Available in USA Trunk Port Number 001 200 Extension Number Default Dial Up to 8 digits No setting ...

Page 565: ...mming mode 2 14 10 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the HOLD or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 14 10 01 Trunk1 PF Telephone ba...

Page 566: ...lated Program 01 Extension Name Set the extension virtual extension name Up to 12 Characters 200 EXT 200 499 EXT 499 02 Outgoing Trunk Line Preference Use this option to set the extension s outgoing Trunk Line Preference If enabled the extension user get trunk dial tone when they lift the handset The user hears trunk dial tone only if allowed by Trunk Access Map pro gramming Programs 14 07 and 15 ...

Page 567: ...e 2 15 01 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 15 01 01 TEL200 Ext Name EXT 200 ba...

Page 568: ...keys 1 3 Key 1 is option 8 Key 2 is option 9 and Key 3 is option 10 0 Japanese 1 English 2 German 3 French 4 Italian 5 Spanish 6 Dutch 7 Portugal 8 Norwegian 9 Danish 10 Swedish 1 02 Trunk Ring Tone Use this option to set the tone pitch of the incoming trunk ring for the extension port you are pro gramming 1 High 2 Mid range 3 Low 4 Ring Tone 1 5 Ring Tone 2 6 Ring Tone 3 7 Ring Tone 4 8 Ring Tone...

Page 569: ...d Key Operating Mode Use this option to set the function of the keyset Hold key The Hold key can activate normal Hold Exclusive Hold or Park 0 Normal Hold 1 Exclusive Hold 2 Park 0 07 Automatic Hold for CO Lines 0 Enable Hold 1 Disable Disconnect 1 08 Pre select One touch Key 0 Pre select 1 One touch 1 09 Ringing Line Preference for Intercom Calls Use this option to select between Idle and Ringing...

Page 570: ...nal numbers 0 or only external numbers 1 0 Extension Trunk Mode 1 Trunk Mode 1 14 Sending Sub address for Virtual Extension call 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 15 Storage of Caller ID for answered call 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 16 Handsfree Operation 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 18 Power saving mode 0 Normal mode 1 Power saving mode 1 19 CTA Data Communication Mode 0 CTI mode 1 non procedural mode 0 15 02 20 20 Baud rat...

Page 571: ...SG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section Incoming Signal Frequency Pattern Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation External Incoming Signal Frequency Pattern 1 High Middle Low 1100 660 520 1400 760 660 16Hz 16Hz 16Hz External Incoming Signal Frequency Pattern 2 High Middle Low 1100 660 520 1400 760 660 8Hz 8Hz 8Hz External Incoming Signa...

Page 572: ...ted telephone uses 0 DP 1 DTMF 0 02 Loop current Not Used 0 20mA 1 35mA 0 03 Terminal Type Enter 1 for this option to allow a single line port to receive DTMF tones after the initial call setup Enter 0 to have the port ignore DTMF tones after the initial call setup For Voice Mail always enter 1 e g receive DTMF tones 0 Normal 1 Special 0 04 Flashing Enables disables Flash for single line 500 2500 ...

Page 573: ...5 Extension Basic Setup 15 03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 567 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Single Line Telephone Analogue Single Line Telephone Digital ...

Page 574: ...ogramming mode 2 15 03 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 15 03 01 TEL200 SLT Ty...

Page 575: ...0 00 00 to FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 The MAC Address of a ter minal which registers extension number 15 05 01 03 Default URL address URL address No setting The default URL address for Smart Phone 15 05 01 04 H 323 fixed port assignment Up to 48 Character Length No setting The alias address of H 323 terminal is set up Each alias address must be unique in the system 15 05 01 05 11 For view...

Page 576: ...Procedure Port 12 System Type 0 No other system 1 Aspila EX 0 For system interconnection 13 IP Address of Other Sys tem 1 0 0 1 126 255 255 254 128 1 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 1 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 14 Call Control Port of Other System 1 65535 1720 15 CODEC Type 0 Type 1 1 Type 2 2 Type 3 3 Type 4 4 Type 5 0 Item No Item Input Data Default Description Related Program ...

Page 577: ...ng mode 2 15 05 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 15 05 01 TEL200 IP Phone Type...

Page 578: ...cess map for each extension An extension can only place outgoing calls on trunks to which it has outgoing access Use Program 14 07 to define the available 200 access maps Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing Level Aspila EX IN Available Extension Number Max 8 digits Day Night Mode 1 8 Day Night Mode Trunk Access Map No Defau...

Page 579: ...g mode 2 15 06 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 15 06 01 TEL200 Mode1 Acc Map ...

Page 580: ...es a Group Call Pickup key for Pickup Group 1 You can also program Function Keys using Service Codes In order to clear any previously programmed key press the CLEAR key to erase any displayed code Input Data Default Programmable keys 1 12 are line keys key 1 line 1 key 2 line 2 etc All other programmable keys are undefined Level Aspila EX SA Available Extension Number Max 8 digits Line Key Number ...

Page 581: ...Call log Off No call log 09 Operation Mode Switch Mode number 1 8 Red On On mode 10 Call Forward Immediate Slow Blink Red Forwarding state Rapid Blink Red Forwarded state 11 Call Forward Busy Slow Blink Red Forwarding state Rapid Blink Red Forwarded state 12 Call Forward No Answer Slow Blink Red Forwarding state Rapid Blink Red Forwarded state 13 Call Forward Busy No Answer Slow Blink Red Forwardi...

Page 582: ...l number Common Private None 28 Abbreviated Dial Group Abbreviated dial number Group None 29 Repeat Redial Rapid Blink Red Under a repeat dial 30 Saved Number Redial None 31 Memo Dial None 32 Meet Me Conference None 33 Override Off Hook Signaling None 34 Break In None 35 Camp On Red On Under camp on or reservation 36 Step Call None 37 DND FWD Override Call None 38 Message Waiting None 39 Room Moni...

Page 583: ...Account Code None 51 General Purpose Relay Relay No 0 1 8 Red On Relay On 52 Incoming Call Queuing Setup Incoming Group Number Red On Under setting 53 Queuing Message Starting Red On Active 54 External Call Forward by Door Box Red On Active 55 Extension Name Edit None 56 Department Incoming Call Automatic Transfer 57 Department Incoming Call Delayed 58 Department Incoming Call Immediate Extension ...

Page 584: ...recording No Destination Red On Under recording Appointed destination 70 Automated Attendant for Extension Extension Number or Department Group Number None 71 Message Change for Voice Attendant Extension Number or Department Group Number None 72 Keypad Facility Key 73 Keypad Hold Key 74 Keypad Retrieve Key 75 Keypad Conference Key 76 Toll Restriction in Credit 77 Voice Mail In Skin Extension Numer...

Page 585: ...al Extension Key Extension Number or Depart ment Group Number 04 Park Key Park Number 01 64 05 Loop Keys 0 Incoming Trunk Group Number 001 100 1 Outgoing Trunk Group Number 001 100 2 Both Trunk Group Number 001 100 06 Trunk Access Via Networking Network System Number 01 50 10 ACD Log In Log Out Red On Under log on Off Under log off 11 ACD Conversation Recording Red On Under recording Slow Blink Re...

Page 586: ...1 Enter the programming mode 2 15 07 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 15 07 01...

Page 587: ... Number Max 8 digits Incoming Ring Pattern Default Description 0 Tone pattern 1 1 Tone pattern 2 2 Tone pattern 3 3 Tone pattern 4 4 Incoming extension ring tone 0 Tone pattern 1 When an extension or a virtual extension is assigned to the function key on the key telephone select the ring tone when receiving a call on that key Incoming Signal Frequency Pattern Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulatio...

Page 588: ... Ring Tone Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 15 08 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming...

Page 589: ...ned in Program 15 07 You make an assignment for each Night Service Mode Assign extension numbers and names to virtual extension ports in Program 15 01 Program Virtual Extension keys in Program 15 07 code 03 Input Data Conditions Program the Multiple Directory Number function keys NOT to ring before removing the key from a keyset s programming Feature Cross Reference Multiple Directory Number Call ...

Page 590: ...ogramming mode 2 15 09 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 15 09 01 TEL200 KY01 M...

Page 591: ... rings The other keys just flash Input Data Default By default Virtual Extension ring tones have the following order Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Multiple Directory Number Call Coverage Level Aspila EX SA Available Extension Number Up to 8 digits Order Data Description Related Program 1 4 0 Tone pattern 1 1 Tone pattern 2 2 Tone pattern 3 3 Tone pattern 4 4 Incoming extension ring tone ...

Page 592: ...1 Enter the programming mode 2 15 10 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 15 10 01...

Page 593: ...You make an assignment for each Night Service Mode Assign extension numbers Program 11 04 and names Program 15 01 to virtual extension ports Program Multiple Directory Number virtual extension keys in Program 15 07 code 03 Input Data Conditions Program the Multiple Directory Number keys NOT to ring before removing the key from a keyset s programming Feature Cross Reference Multiple Directory Numbe...

Page 594: ...programming mode 2 15 11 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 15 11 01 TEL200 KY01...

Page 595: ...eature Cross Reference Voice Mail Level Aspila EX IN Available Extension Number Max 8 digits Item Number Item Input Data Default Description 01 Recording Destination Extension Number Max 8 digits No setting 02 Automatic Recording for Incoming Calls 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 When an incoming trunk call is answered this determines whether or not conversation recording is started automatically 03 Recordin...

Page 596: ...nter the programming mode 2 15 12 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 15 12 01 TE...

Page 597: ...options Input Data Default Programmable Function Key No 01 32 Data 1 Outgoing Option 0 Assigns the Loop Key for ARS Data 2 Incoming Options 0 Assigns the Loop Key to all trunk groups Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Loop Key Level Aspila EX IN Available Extension Number Max 8 digits Key Number 01 48 Item Number Item Input Data 01 Data 1 Outgoing Option 0 100 0 Assigns the Loop Key for ARS 1...

Page 598: ... the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 15 13 01 TEL200 OUTGOING KY01 0 back select 15 12 nn...

Page 599: ...gram 15 14 Programmble One Touch Keys to define the One Touch key data for each keyset telephone Input Data Default No entries for any extension Conditions None Feature Cross Reference One Touch Keys Level Aspila EX IN Available Extension Number Max 8 digits Key Number 01 10 Dial Data Name 1 0 Pause Hookflash Code for Answer Wait Up to 24 digits Up to 12 Digits ...

Page 600: ... mode 2 15 14 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 15 14 01 TEL200 KY01 Dial back ...

Page 601: ...ng can be either circular cycles to all phones in group or pri ority cycles to highest priority extensions first 0 Priority Routing 1 Circular Routing 0 16 02 03 Department Routing When Busy Use this option to set how the system routes an Intercom call to a busy Department Group member Inter com callers to the extension can either hear busy or route to the first available department number This on...

Page 602: ... for STG 0 Disable Recall 1 Enable non Recall 0 08 Maximum Queuing Number of Extension Group Call 0 32 0 No limitation 0 09 Department Hunting No Answer Time Set how long a call will ring a Department group extension before hunting occurs 0 64800 15 10 Hunt Type Set the type of hunting for each Extension Department Group 0 No queuing 1 Hunting When Busy 2 Hunting When Not Answered 3 Hunting When B...

Page 603: ...ode 2 16 01 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Department Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL UME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 16 01 01 TEL Group1 Dept ...

Page 604: ... Also use this program to set the priority of each extension within each Department Group When a call comes into the group it may ring the extensions in order of their priority Input Data Note The initial value of a priority becomes the ports numerical order assigned in Program 11 02 and 11 04 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Department Calling Level Aspila EX IN Available Extension Number ...

Page 605: ... programming mode 2 16 02 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 16 02 01 TEL200 Ext...

Page 606: ...nt Group for extensions Up to 16 extensions can be assigned per a Department Group Input Data Default All extension groups No setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Department Calling Level Aspila EX IN Available Department Extension Group Number 01 64 Secondary Extension Number Extension Number Priority Order Description 1 16 Max 8 digits 0 999 This program is set up when using telephone...

Page 607: ...03 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Pilot extension number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL UME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 16 03 01 Pilot Extn1 2ND_Group 01 b...

Page 608: ...d 05 DTMF Receive Active Time 0 64800 10 For OPXs analogue telephones and cer tain analogue trunks like DISA the system attaches a DTMF receiver to the port for this interval The system releases the receiver after the interval expires 25 07 01 06 Alarm Duration 0 64800 30 This interval sets the duration of the alarm signal 07 Callback Ring Dura tion Time 0 64800 15 Callback rings an extension for ...

Page 609: ... the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section Network Outgoing Inter Digit ARS Timer 0 64800 30 Future Item Not Yet Available Detection time for Network disconnect signal 0 64800 10 Future Item Not Yet Available Guard time after no disconnect signal 0 64800 30 Future Item Not Yet Available MFC Signal In...

Page 610: ...LED off 02 Trunk Loop Access Key Operating Mode Use this option to set the operating mode of the extension s trunk group keys The keys can be for incoming access outgo ing access or both 0 Outgoing Incoming 1 Outgoing 2 Incoming 0 03 BLF Control Set the conditions under which a Hot line Reverse Voice Over or DSS Con sole key indicates that an extension is busy Refer to the Reverse Voice Over featu...

Page 611: ...r 10 MAR TUE 15 15 Type 6 24 hour 15 15 MAR 10 TUE Type 7 24 hour 3 10 TUE 15 15 Type 8 24 hour 15 15 TUE 10 MAR 3 08 LCD Display Holding Time 0 64800 seconds 5 09 Disconnect Supervision Use this option to enable or disable dis connect supervision for the system trunks 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 10 Time Before Shifting to Power Saving Mode 0 Power Saving Mode Off 1 1 minutes 2 2 minutes 3 4 minutes 4 8 ...

Page 612: ...ystem Options for Multi Line Telephones 1 Enter the programming mode 2 20 02 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 20 02 01 TRK GP_Key_OP 0 Display back select 20 02 nn nnnnn ...

Page 613: ...ail Conversation Record 0 11 12 47 02 Ignore Received DP Dial on DTMF SLT Port 0 Do Not Ignore 1 Ignore Use this option to define whether the system should receive dial pulse and DTMF signals 0 or ignore dial pulse and only accept DTMF signals 1 0 15 03 01 03 SLT DTMF Dial to Trunk Lines 0 Receive all dialed data before sending 1 Direct through out Type 0 The system keeps the digits dialed by the ...

Page 614: ...hones 1 Enter the programming mode 2 20 03 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 04 Trunk call dial sending start time by SLT 0 64800 3 05 SLT Operation Mode 0 Normal Mode 1 Extended Mo...

Page 615: ... Feature Cross Reference Multiple Directory Number Call Coverage Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Input Data Default 01 The virtual extension operation mode when answered incoming call 0 Release virtual extension after answered incoming call 1 Holding a virtual extension after answered incoming call 1 02 Not Available 03 Call Coverage Delay Interval Multiple Directory Number Call Cover ag...

Page 616: ... 20 04 System Options for Virtual Extensions 1 Enter the programming mode 2 20 04 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 20 04 01 V Ext Answer 1 Keep 20 04 nn nnnnn ...

Page 617: ...t Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Input Data Default 04 Setting of Charge Cost per Unit 0 65535 0 06 Advice of Charge for Telephone Display 0 No decimal point 1 Decimal point s character is period 2 Decimal point s character is comma 1 07 Advice of Charge for SMDR 0 No decimal point 1 Decimal point s chara...

Page 618: ...de 2 20 05 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the HOLD or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 20 05 04 Charge Cost 0 No back sele...

Page 619: ...of Service that can be assigned To specify the options in each Class of Ser vice refer to Programs 20 07 through 20 13 You make eight entries for Program 20 06 one for each Night Service Mode Input Data Default Extension numbers 200 and 201 are set as Class 1 All other extension numbers are set as Class 2 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Class of Service Level Aspila EX IN Available Extensi...

Page 620: ...amming mode 2 20 06 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 20 06 01 TEL200 Mode1 Cla...

Page 621: ... 1 On 1 0 11 10 01 02 Changing the Music on Hold Tone Enable disable an extension s ability to change the Music on Hold tone 0 Off 1 On 1 0 11 10 02 03 Time Setting Enables disables an extension s ability to set the Time via Service Code 828 0 Off 1 On 1 0 11 10 03 04 Storing Abbreviated Dialing Entries Enables disables an extension s ability to store Abbreviated Dialing numbers With this disabled...

Page 622: ...ff 1 On 1 0 11 10 27 13 VRS Record Enables disables extension s ability to record erase and lis ten to VRS messages 0 Off 1 On 1 0 14 VRS General Message Listen Enables disables extension s ability to dial 4 or Service Code 711 and listen to the General Message 0 Off 1 On 1 0 11 10 21 15 VRS General Message Record Enables disables extension s ability to dial Service Code 712 and record listen to o...

Page 623: ...rogramming mode 2 20 07 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Class of Service number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL UME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 20 07 01 FCTN...

Page 624: ...e extension 0 Off 1 On 1 0 02 Trunk Calls Enable disable outgoing trunk calling for the extension 0 Off 1 On 1 0 03 Common Abbreviated Dialing 0 Off 1 On 1 0 04 Group Abbreviated Dialing 0 Off 1 On 1 0 05 Dial Number Preview Enable disable an extension s ability to use Dial Number Preview 0 Off 1 On 1 0 06 Toll Restriction Override Enables disables Toll Restricting Override Service Code 875 0 Off ...

Page 625: ... disables an extension s ability to use Department Group Step Calling 0 Off 1 On 1 0 13 CLIP 0 Off 1 On 1 0 14 Call Address Information 0 Off 1 On 0 0 15 Block Outgoing Caller ID Enable 1 or disable 0 the system s ability to automati cally block outgoing Caller ID information when a user places a call If this option is on the system automatically inserts the Caller ID block code defined in Program...

Page 626: ... programming mode 2 20 08 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Class of Service number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL UME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 20 08 01 FC...

Page 627: ...call from a DID DISA DIL or tie line caller Note With this option set to 1 the destination extension must be busy in order for a second DNIS caller to ring through If the destination extension does not have a line or loop key available for the second call and a previous call is ringing the extension but has not yet been answered the sec ond caller will hear busy regardless of this program s settin...

Page 628: ...ing mode 2 20 09 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Class of Service number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL UME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 20 09 01 FCTN Cls1 2...

Page 629: ... Code 869 0 Off 1 On 1 0 03 Group Call Pickup for Specific Group Enables disables Group Call Pickup for a specific group using service code 868 0 Off 1 On 1 0 04 Group Call Pickup Enable disable an extension s ability to pick up a call ringing into a Pickup Group Service Codes 867 and 856 0 Off 1 On 1 0 05 Directed Call Pickup for Own Group Enables disables Directed Call Pickup for calls ringing a...

Page 630: ...rvice 1 Enter the programming mode 2 20 10 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Class of Service number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL UME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming se...

Page 631: ...For ward When Busy 0 Off 1 On 0 0 03 Call Forwarding When Unanswered Enables disables an extension s ability to use Call For ward When Unanswered 0 Off 1 On 1 0 04 Call Forwarding Both Ringing Enables Disables an extension s ability to activate Call Forwarding with Both Ringing 0 Off 1 On 1 0 05 Call Forwarding with Follow Me Enables disables an extension s ability to initiate Call Forwarding with...

Page 632: ...0 0 14 Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction Disable 0 or enable 1 the Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction option If enabled trunk to trunk transfer is not possible 0 Off 1 On 1 0 15 VRS Personal Greeting Enables disables extension s ability to dial Service Code 713 7 to record listen to or erase the Personal Greeting Message 0 Off 1 On 1 0 16 Call Redirect Enable or disable a keyset user s ability ...

Page 633: ...ramming mode 2 20 11 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Class of Service number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL UME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 20 11 01 FCTN Cl...

Page 634: ...am 20 12 Class of Service Options Charging Cost Service to define the Charging Cost feature availability for each extension s Class of Service Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Class of Service Level Aspila EX IN Available Class of Service Number 01 15 Item No Item Input Data Default COS 01 14 COS 15 02 Advice of Charge ISDN AOC 0 Off 1 On 1 0 03 Cost Display For TTU 0 Off 1 On 1 ...

Page 635: ... the programming mode 2 20 12 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Class of Service number to be programmed by pressing the HOLD or the VOL UME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 20 12 01...

Page 636: ...off for incoming calls 0 Off 1 On 0 0 03 Long Conversation Cutoff Outgoing Enables disables an extension s ability to use Long Con versation Cutoff for outgoing calls 0 Off 1 On 0 0 04 Call Forwarding DND Override Enables disables an extension s ability to use Call For warding DND Override 0 Off 1 On 1 0 05 Intercom Off Hook Signaling Enables 1 or disables 0 an extension s ability to receive off h...

Page 637: ...ng extension 0 Off 1 On 0 0 17 Barge In Tone Display Use this option to enable disable the Barge In tone If enabled callers hear an alert tone and their display indi cates the Barge In when another extension barges into their conversation If disabled there is no alert tone or display indication 0 Off 1 On 0 0 18 Programmable Function Key Programming General Level Enables disables an extension s ab...

Page 638: ...7 0 Off 1 On 0 0 29 Paging Display Enables 1 or disables 0 an extension s ability to display paging information 0 Off 1 On 1 0 30 Background Music In an extension s Class of Service allow 1 or prevent 0 an extension from turning Background Music on and off 0 Off 1 On 1 0 31 Connected Line identification COLP 0 Off 1 On 0 0 32 Deny Multiple Barge Ins Enable 1 or disable 0 the extension s ability to...

Page 639: ...ry Service 1 Enter the programming mode 2 20 13 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Class of Service number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL UME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programmi...

Page 640: ...e service This option does not apply to DISA 0 Off 1 On 0 0 02 Trunk Group Routing ARS Access This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller s ability to dial 9 for Trunk Group Routing or Automatic Route Selection ARS 0 Off 1 On 0 0 03 Trunk Group Access This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller s ability to access trunk groups for outside calls Service Code 814 0 Off ...

Page 641: ...ta for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 09 Forced Trunk Disconnect Not for ISDN T point This option enables or disables a tie trunk caller s ability to use Forced Trunk Disconnect Service Code 26 This option is not available to DISA callers 0 Off 1...

Page 642: ...on Trunk 1 13 3 02 PBX CES incoming call 8 03 Internal incoming call 8 04 DID DISA 3 05 DID 3 06 Dial In in the E M tie line 8 07 Door Box ringing for SLT 2 08 Virtual Extension Ring 8 09 Call back 4 10 Alarm for SLT 5 11 VRS Waiting Message Incoming Call 6 Number Ringing Cycle 1 On 2 On 2 0 Off 4 0 3 On 1 0 Off 2 0 4 On 0 5 Off 0 5 5 On 0 25 Off 0 25 6 On 0 5 Off 0 5 On 0 5 Off 1 5 7 On 0 25 Off ...

Page 643: ...ramming mode 2 20 15 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 11 On 0 25 Off 0 25 On 0 25 Off 4 25 12 On 1 0 Off 3 0 13 On 0 25 Off 0 25 On 0 25 Off 2 25 20 15 01 TRK_INC_Ring_Cycle 3 back...

Page 644: ...fter selecting your entry press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor 6 Enter characters M O m o 6 After selecting your entry press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor 7 Enter characters P S p p 7 After selecting your entry press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cu...

Page 645: ...ble Display Message Number 01 20 Text data 24 characters Number Message 1 IN MEETING UNTIL 2 MEETING ROOM 3 COME BACK 4 PLEASE CALL 5 BUSY CALL AFTER 6 OUT FOR LUNCH BACK 7 BUSINESS TRIP BACK 8 BUSINESS TRIP 9 GONE FOR THE DAY 10 ON VACATION UNTIL 11 MESSAGE 11 12 MESSAGE 12 13 MESSAGE 13 14 MESSAGE 14 15 MESSAGE 15 16 MESSAGE 16 17 MESSAGE 17 18 MESSAGE 18 19 MESSAGE 19 20 MESSAGE 20 ...

Page 646: ...e programming mode 2 20 16 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the text message number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 20 16 01 Text M...

Page 647: ... 01 Type 5 calls go to the operator selected in this program If you don t assign an extension in Program 90 11 01 system alarms appear on the extension assigned in this option Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Intercom Level Aspila EX IN Available Operator Number 1 8 Item No Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 Operator s Extension Number Up to 8 digits No setting 11 01 02 O...

Page 648: ...17 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the operator number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 20 17 01 Operator1 Operator_No back select ...

Page 649: ...st digit of the Intercom call 02 Busy tone timer 0 64800 15 03 Congestion tone 0 64800 10 A Busy Tone when system resources run short such as DTMF receiver resources 04 Call Waiting Tone Timer 0 64800 10 This option sets the interval between Call Waiting tones This timer also sets the inter val between Off Hook Signal ing alerts 05 Keyset Confirmation Tone 0 64800 10 06 Interval of call wait ing t...

Page 650: ...ns To enter data for Program 20 18 Service Tone Timers 1 Enter the programming mode 2 20 18 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 20 18 01 Ext DT_Time 1240 Sec back select 20 18 nn nnnn...

Page 651: ...la EX IN Available Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Caller ID Displaying Format if Displaying Digits are more than 12 digits 0 First 10 digits 1 Last 10 digits 0 02 Caller ID Wait Timer When an incoming CO call is received the sys tem starts the timer It will wait the programmed time for Caller ID information from telco before connecting the CO call 0 30 5 03 Caller ID Edit Mode Edit Caller ID E...

Page 652: ...ystem Options for Caller ID 1 Enter the programming mode 2 20 19 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 20 19 01 Caller ID Format 0 Upper back select 20 19 nn nnnnn ...

Page 653: ... Message Setup for Non Caller ID Data 1 Enter the programming mode 2 20 20 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Private ...

Page 654: ...X IN Available Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Long Conversation Alarm 1 The warning tone for long toll calls sounds after this interval 0 64800 170 02 Long Conversation Alarm 2 After the initial long toll call warning tone additional warning tones sound after this interval 0 64800 180 03 Long Conversation Cutoff for Incoming Call This timer determines how long the system will wait before disco...

Page 655: ...System Options for Long Conversation 1 Enter the programming mode 2 20 21 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 20 21 01 Long_Conv Al1 170 Sec back select 20 21 nn nnnnn ...

Page 656: ... Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Computer Telephony Integration CTI Applications Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Delayed ring timer for CTI 0 64800 30 02 ALERT reply time CTI 0 64800 8 03 Trunk Virtual Bridge TSP Driver Enable or disable the system s ability to send trunk or virtual extension information to the TSP driver 0 Disable 1 Enablet 1 04 The timer w...

Page 657: ...tem Options for CTI Service 1 Enter the programming mode 2 20 23 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 20 23 01 CTI_Serv Ans 30 Sec back select 20 23 nn nnnnn ...

Page 658: ...one when CLI is included in the SETUP message the system sends dial tone until the user dials the first digit instead of the network 0 Service On 1 Service Off 0 05 T305 Timer Start Afteer Sending Disconnect Message 0 Service On 1 Service Off 0 06 Call Proceeding Send Mode 0 Service On 1 Service Off 0 07 Busy Tone Mode Set When Disconnect Mes sage Received 0 Busy Tone from NT net work side 0 08 Us...

Page 659: ... enter data for Program 20 25 ISDN Options 1 Enter the programming mode 2 20 25 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 20 25 01 Send Release Msg Off back select 20 25 nn nnnnn ...

Page 660: ...nd Barge In are not allowed until after timer expires 0 64800 Sec 10 14 02 08 04 Researched time for DTD circuit 0 64800 Sec 5 14 02 05 05 Dial Tone Detection Time If dial tone detection is enabled the system will wait this interval for the Telco to return dial tone When the interval expires the sys tem assumes dial tone is not present To dis able this timer and have the system wait continuously e...

Page 661: ...eries s programming section 12 Dial 911 Routing Without Trunk Access If enabled 1 an extension user can dial 911 without first dialing a trunk access code or pressing a line key If disabled 0 an exten sion user must dial a trunk access code e g 9 or press a line key before dialing 911 0 Trunk Access Code Required 1 Trunk Access Code Not Required 1 13 Alarm Ring Timer E911 Use this option to sset t...

Page 662: ...g for Extensions Description Use Program 21 02 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions to assign Program 14 06 routes to extensions Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Level Aspila EX IN Available Extension Number Max 8 digits Day Night Mode Route table number Default Related Program 1 8 0 100 0 No setting 1 14 06 14 01 07 ...

Page 663: ...ming mode 2 21 02 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 21 02 01 TEL200 Mode1 T G R...

Page 664: ...am 21 03 Trunk Group Routing for Trunks to set the Trunk Route Table for Auto matic External Call Forward The Route Table is set in Program 14 06 Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Trunk Group Routing Level Aspila EX IN Available Trunk Port Number 001 200 Day Night Mode Route Table Number Default Related Program 1 8 0 100 0 No setting 1 14 06 14 07 01 ...

Page 665: ...g mode 2 21 03 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 21 03 01 Trunk1 Mode1 T G R 1 back...

Page 666: ...am 21 04 Toll Restriction Class to assign a Toll Restriction class to an extension The details of Toll Restriction are defined in Program 21 05 and 21 06 Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Toll Restriction Level Aspila EX IN Available Extension Number Max 8 digits Day Night Mode Restriction Class Default Related Program 1 9 9 power failure mode 1 15 2 14 01 08 21 05 ...

Page 667: ...mming mode 2 21 04 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 21 04 01 TEL200 Mode1 T R_...

Page 668: ...n of Local Call 0 Disable 1 Enabled This option enables disables restriction for local calls 04 Maximum Number of Digits Table Assignment 1 4 Table 0 Disable Select the table defined in 21 06 03 to be used to determine the maximum number of digits allowed for outgoing calls 21 06 03 05 Common permit code table 0 Unassigned 1 Assigned It chooses whether the table set up by 21 06 04 is referred to o...

Page 669: ...e The user cannot dial a PBX extension If you disable PBX Toll Restriction the system only restricts calls that contain the PBX access code The sys tem does not restrict calls to PBX extensions Refer to the PBX compatibility feature Make sure Program 21 05 04 Maximum Number of Digits Table Assignment allows for PBX Toll Call Dialing normally 12 digits 13 Restriction of tie calls 0 Disable 1 Enable...

Page 670: ...mming mode 2 21 05 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Deny Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 21 05 01 Deny TBL1 Int _C...

Page 671: ...ix digits long using 03 Maximum num ber digits table assignment 1 4 4 30 Tables 1 4 30 This option selects the maximum number of digits allowed in outgoing calls for each table 04 Common permit code table 1 10 Dial Up to 4 digits Table 1 911 Table 2 1800 Table 3 1888 Tables 4 10 No Setting This option lets you program the Common Permit Code Table This table contains up to 10 codes you commonly all...

Page 672: ...ss Code When the system is behind a PBX this is the code users dial to access a PBX trunk Toll Restriction begins after the PBX access code For PBX trunks Pro gram 14 04 the system only Toll Restricts calls that contain the access code Always program this option when the system is behind a PBX even if you don t want to use Toll Restriction PBX Access Codes can be up to 2 digits using 0 9 and LINE ...

Page 673: ...06 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the International Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL UME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 21 06 01 Int l TBL 1 IDD_Dial_R...

Page 674: ...up to assign Toll Restriction Over ride codes to extension ports Each code must be four digits long using any combination of 0 9 and Each extension can have a separate code or many extensions can share the same override code Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Toll Restriction Override Level Aspila EX SA Available Extension Number Max 8 digits Password Default Related Program 4 digi...

Page 675: ...ramming mode 2 21 07 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 21 07 01 TEL200 T R_Over...

Page 676: ...et how many times a Repeat Redial will automatically repeat if the call does not go through 0 255 3 02 Repeat Redial Interval Time This timer sets the interval between Repeat Redial attempts 0 64800 60 03 Repeat Dial Calling Timer After dialing the trunk call Repeat Redial maintains the call after this interval After this interval the system ter minates the call waits the Repeat Redial Time Timer ...

Page 677: ... 08 Repeat Dial Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 21 08 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 21 08 01 Repeat_Times 3 back select 21 08 nn nnnnn ...

Page 678: ...rol the supervisor is not an assigned extension If Dial Block is available for all Classes of Service everyone may become a supervisor if they know the Dial Block password Feature Cross Reference Toll Restriction Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Toll Restriction Class With Dial Block Assign a Toll Restriction Class of Service when the Dial Block feature is used 1 15 ...

Page 679: ...09 Dial Block Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 21 09 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 21 09 01 D Block_Rest 15 back select 21 09 nn nnnnn ...

Page 680: ...ial Block Restriction Class Per Extensions to define the Toll Restriction Class to each extension when the extension is set for Dial Block Restriction If this data is 0 Toll Restriction Class follows Program 21 09 01 Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Toll Restriction Level Aspila EX IN Available Extension Number Max 8 digit Toll Restriction Class Default 0 1 15 0 No Setting 0 No S...

Page 681: ... programming mode 2 21 10 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 21 10 01 TEL200 D B...

Page 682: ...ram 21 11 Extension Ringdown Hotline Assignment to define the Hotline destina tion number for each extension number Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Ringdown Extension Level Aspila EX IN Available Extension Number Max 8 digits Hotline destination number Default Related Program 0 Pause Hooking Code to wait for a response Max 24 digits No setting 20 08 09 21 01 09 ...

Page 683: ...ogramming mode 2 21 11 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 21 11 01 TEL200 Hotlin...

Page 684: ...digits per entry When a call is made by an extension which does not have an Extension Calling Number assigned Program 21 13 the system sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk defined in 21 12 Note If the Calling Party Number is assigned in both Programs 21 12 and 21 13 the system sends the data in Program 21 13 Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ISDN Compatibility Level Aspila ...

Page 685: ... the programming mode 2 21 12 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 21 12 01 Trunk1 CLI...

Page 686: ...ber is the subscriber number of the dial in number When a call is made by an extension which does not have an Exten sion Calling Number assigned Program 21 12 the system sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk defined in Program 21 13 Note If a Calling Party Number is assigned in both Programs 21 12 and 21 13 the system sends the data in Program 21 13 Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross R...

Page 687: ...ter the programming mode 2 21 13 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 21 13 01 TEL...

Page 688: ...oll Restriction Password Setup to assign the password and Toll Restriction Class for Walking Toll Restriction Each code is six digits long using any combination of 0 9 and Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Toll Restriction Level Aspila EX SA Available ID Table Number 1 500 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 User ID Dial 6 digits No setting 02 Walking Toll Restriction Class Number ...

Page 689: ...ogramming mode 2 21 14 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the ID Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 21 14 01 Table1 User_Pa...

Page 690: ...d when a user dials the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code Refer to Program 11 09 02 Alternate Trunk Access Code when setting up alternate trunk codes Turn to Program 14 06 Trunk Group Routing to set up the trunk routes When entering data for this option enter the route number or 0 to prevent routing Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Central Office Calls Placing Level Aspila EX IN ...

Page 691: ...the programming mode 2 21 15 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 21 15 01 TEL200 ...

Page 692: ...change to a unique ring cadence to indicate that the call has been ringing too long If dis abled this will not occur 22 01 03 22 01 04 03 Ring No Answer Alarm Time 0 64800 Sec 60 If a trunk rings a key telephone longer than this interval the system changes the ring cadence This indicates to the user that the call has been ringing too long 22 01 02 04 DIL No Answer Recall Time 0 64800 Sec 0 A DIL t...

Page 693: ... item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 10 VRS Waiting Message Opera tion 0 Enable always 1 Change by man ual operation 0 This program set up the operation mode for Auto Attendant and Queuing Mes sage 22 14 22 15 22 08 22 04 22 01 04 20 15 11 15 07 11 VRS Waiting Message Interval Time 0 64800 Sec 20 Setup ...

Page 694: ...er changing Program 22 02 01 to match the telco s con nected T1 service type the T1 cable or the T1 PCB must be unplugged and then reconnected in order for the T1 PCB to sync Feature Cross Reference Central Office Calls Answering Level Aspila EX IN Available Trunk port number 1 200 Day Night Mode Incoming Type Default Description Related Program 1 8 0 Normal 1 VRS Second dial tone if no VRS instal...

Page 695: ...02 Incoming Service Type Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 22 02 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 22 02 01 Mode1 0 Normal back select 22 02 nn nnnnn ...

Page 696: ... number 1 200 Ring Tone Pattern Default Description Related Program 0 3 Ring Tone pattern 1 4 0 Use this program to select the ring tone range for the trunk The trunk uses a ring tone within the range selected when it rings an extension There are four ring tones available 15 02 Incoming Signal Frequency Pattern Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation Pattern 1 High Middle Low 1100 660 520 1400 760...

Page 697: ...he programming mode 2 22 03 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 22 03 01 Trunk1 TRK_R...

Page 698: ...05 to assign trunks to Ring Groups IRG can have up to 32 extension numbers assigned Input Data Default Extension 200 rings for incoming Ring Group 1 calls All other extensions do not ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Ring Groups Level Aspila EX SA Available Incoming Ring Group Number 1 100 Incoming Ring Group No Extension Number Description Related Progra...

Page 699: ...ng mode 2 22 04 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Incoming Ring Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 22 04 01 INC Group1...

Page 700: ...signment to assign trunks to incoming Ring Groups Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Ring Groups Level Aspila EX IN Available Trunk Port Number 001 200 Day Night Mode Incoming Group Number Default Description Related Program 1 8 0 No setting 1 100 Incoming Group 101 DSPDB Voice Mail 102 In Skin Voice Mail 1 Use this program to assign Normal Ring Trunks 22 02 to Incoming Ring Groups...

Page 701: ...rogramming mode 2 22 05 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 22 05 01 Trunk1 Mode1 1 b...

Page 702: ...gram 22 06 Normal Incoming Ring Mode to define whether or not an extension should ring for the Normal Incoming Ring Mode Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Central Office Calls Answering Level Aspila EX IN Available Extension Number Max 8 digits Day Night Mode Incoming Group Number Default Related Program 1 8 0 No Ring 1 Ring 1 22 04 22 05 ...

Page 703: ...2 22 06 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 22 06 01 TEL200 Mode1 1 Ring On back ...

Page 704: ...ine key the DIL rings the line key If the extension does not have a line key the DIL rings loop keys if programmed or one of the CALL keys CALL keys will always ring Use Program 22 02 to designate a trunk as a DIL You can make eight DIL assignments one for each Night Service mode Input Data Conditions Program 22 02 must be set to 4 for the trunk Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward Line DIL Level...

Page 705: ...07 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 22 07 01 Trunk1 Mode1 back select 22 07 nn Tru...

Page 706: ...ered DIL rings this group after the DIL No Answer Time expires Program 22 01 04 DIL Delayed Ringing can also reroute outside calls ringing a Ring Group You make eight assignments one for each Night Service mode Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward Line DIL Ring Group Level Aspila EX IN Available Trunk Port Number 001 200 Day Night Mode Incoming Group Number Default 1 8 ...

Page 707: ...ing mode 2 22 08 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 22 08 01 Trunk1 Mode1 1 back sel...

Page 708: ...e from the telco Use this program to make the system com patible with three and four digit DID service 1 8 4 02 Received Vacant Number Operation Use this option to enable or disable Vacant Number Intercept 0 Disconnect 1 Transfer Program 22 12 0 03 Sub addressing Mode 0 Extension number specify 1 DID Conversion Table 0 04 DID Receiving Mode for ISDN 0 Enbloc receiving 1 Overlap receiving 0 05 Loca...

Page 709: ...r the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Trunk Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 22 09 01 Trk Group 1 DDI_Rcv Digit 4digit back se...

Page 710: ...entries that you can allocate among 20 Translation Tables Conditions None Input Data Default Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Level Aspila EX IN Available Conversion Table Area Number 01 20 Item Input data 1st Area Setup Start Address 0 2000 0 No setting 1st Area Setup End Address 2nd Area Setup Start Address 2nd Area Setup End Address Conversion Table Area 1st 2nd Start Table End Table Sta...

Page 711: ...mode 2 22 10 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Conversion Table Area number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 22 10 01 Conv Area1 ...

Page 712: ...ters A C a c 2 After selecting your entry press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor 3 Enter characters D F a f 3 After selecting your entry press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor 4 Enter characters G I g i 4 After selecting your entry press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Ke...

Page 713: ...Number 1 2000 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Received Number Max 8 digits No setting 02 Target Number Max 24 digits No setting 03 DID Name Max 12 characters No setting 04 Transfer Operation Mode 0 No transfer 1 Busy 2 No answer 3 Busy No answer 0 05 Transfer Destination Number 1 0 No setting 1 100 Incoming Group 101 DSPDB Voice Mail 102 In Skin Voice Mail 201 264 Extension Group 400 DID 401 DI...

Page 714: ...ion 1 Enter the programming mode 2 22 11 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Conversation Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming sec...

Page 715: ...o station card installed or the extension number is not defined in Program 11 02 Busy intercept Ring no answer intercept If the destination is 0 the calls will be forwarded to the trunk ring group defined in Program 22 11 based on the table assigned to the DID trunk Note If Program 22 09 05 and 22 09 06 are set the priority of transferring will be in this order Program 22 09 05 Program 22 09 06 Pr...

Page 716: ... 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Conversion Table Area number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 22 12 01 Conv Area1 Mode1 1 back...

Page 717: ...sign the DID Trunk Groups to DID Translation Tables DID trunks should be in their own group If you have more than one type of DID trunk put each type in a separate Trunk Group For each Trunk Group you make a Translation Table entry for each Night Service mode Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward Dialing DID Level Aspila EX IN Available Trunk Group Number 1 100 Day Night...

Page 718: ...he programming mode 2 22 13 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Trunk Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 22 13 01 Trk Gr...

Page 719: ...itions None Feature Cross Reference None Level Aspila EX IN Available Incoming Ring Group Number 1 100 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 1st waiting message start timing 0 64800 0 02 1st waiting message Number 0 49 0 No message 49 Fixed message 0 03 1st waiting message sending count 0 255 0 04 2nd waiting message Number 0 49 0 No message 49 Fixed message 0 05 2nd waiting message sending count 0 2...

Page 720: ...22 14 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Incoming Ring Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 22 14 01 INC Group1 MSG1_Str ...

Page 721: ...ata Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Department Group Level Aspila EX IN Available Extension Group Number 01 64 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 1st waiting message start timing 0 64800 0 02 1st waiting message Number 0 49 0 No message 49 Fixed message 0 03 1st waiting message sending count 0 255 0 04 2nd waiting message Number 0 49 0 No message 49 Fixed message 0 05 2nd waiting message s...

Page 722: ...ode 2 22 15 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Extension Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL UME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 22 15 01 Extn Group1 MSG1_...

Page 723: ...up 23 01 System Options for Group Call Pickup Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 717 Program 23 Answer Features Setup 23 01 System Options for Group Call Pickup Description Not currently available Level Aspila EX IN Not Available ...

Page 724: ...f two extensions in a group are ringing at the same time Group Call Pickup intercepts the highest priority extension first Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Group Call Pickup Level Aspila EX IN Available Extension Number Max 8 digits Group Number Priority Default Description Related Program 1 64 1 999 1 xxx Use this program to assign extensions to Call Pickup Groups other than the...

Page 725: ...2 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 23 02 01 TEL200 Call_Pickup_GP1 back select...

Page 726: ...automatically answer the ringing calls based on Trunk Group Routing programming defined in Program 14 06 The exten sion user s own ringing calls however always have priority over calls ringing other co worker s extensions Refer to the Line Preference feature for more information You make one entry for each Night Service mode Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Line Preference Night ...

Page 727: ...mode 2 23 03 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 23 03 01 TEL200 Mode1 Route 0 ba...

Page 728: ...phone Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Multiple Directory Numbers Call Coverage Level Aspila EX IN Available Extension Number Max 8 digits Priority Extension Group Number Default Description Related Program 1 4 00 64 00 Don t care 00 When an extension has a virtual extension assigned to a Programmable Function Key this program determines the priority for automatically answering t...

Page 729: ...the programming mode 2 23 04 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 23 04 01 TEL200 ...

Page 730: ...Time After this inter val the system invokes the Hold recall time again Cycling between timer 01 and 02 and 06 and 07 continues until a user answers the call 0 64800 Sec 30 03 Exclusive Hold Recall Time A call left on Exclusive Hold recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after this interval 0 64800 Sec 90 04 Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an extension for ...

Page 731: ... for Program 24 01 System Options for Hold 1 Enter the programming mode 2 24 01 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 24 01 01 Hold_Recall 90 Sec back select 24 01 nn nnnnn ...

Page 732: ...ears ringback while their call rings the destination extension 0 Hold Tone 1 Ring Back Tone 0 20 03 02 03 Delayed Call Forwarding Time If activated at an extension Delayed Call Forwarding occurs after this inter val This also sets how long a Trans ferred call waits at an extension forwarded to Voice Mail before routing to the called extension s mailbox 0 64800 Sec 10 04 Transfer Recall Time An una...

Page 733: ...er data for Program 24 02 System Options for Transfer 1 Enter the programming mode 2 24 02 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 24 02 01 Busy_Ext TRFR 0 No back select 24 02 nn nnnnn ...

Page 734: ... system allows a total of 64 Park Groups An extension can only pick up a call parked in orbit by an extension in its own group Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Park Level Aspila EX IN Available Extension Number Max 8 digits Park Group Number Default Description Related Program 1 64 1 Assign an extension to a Park Group The system allows a total of 64 Park Groups 15 07 01 ...

Page 735: ...the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 24 03 01 TEL200 Park_Hold_Group 1 back select 24 03 n...

Page 736: ...umber bin which should be used as the destination of the Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Transfer Level Aspila EX IN Available Trunk Port Number 001 200 Day Night Mode Abbreviated Dial Area Number Default Description Related Program 1 8 0 1999 1999 The destination of telephone number of the Trunk to Trunk Transfer uses the number registered into...

Page 737: ...ramming mode 2 24 04 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Trunk Port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 24 04 01 Trk Port 1 Mod...

Page 738: ...ich is used as the destination of the extension for the Department Group Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Transfer Level Aspila EX IN Available Department Group Number 01 64 Day Night Mode Abbreviated Dial Area Number Default Description Related Program 1 8 0 1999 1999 The Abbreviated Dialing area is used as the registration place for the destination of the transferred telephone ...

Page 739: ... 2 24 05 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Extension Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL UME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 24 05 01 Extn Group1 Mode1 Ab...

Page 740: ...h Ringing with Voice Mail ports Feature Cross Reference Call Forwarding Fixed Level Aspila EX IN Available Fixed Call Forwarding Type Description 0 Fixed Call Forwarding disabled 1 Fixed Call Forwarding with both extensions ringing 2 Fixed Call Forwarding when unanswered 3 Fixed Call Forwarding immediate 4 Fixed Call Forwarding when busy or unanswered Extension Number Max 8 digits Substitute call ...

Page 741: ...06 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 24 06 01 TEL200 Fix_C F_Type0 None back se...

Page 742: ...lephone number for each extension virtual extension The off premise destination can be up to 24 digits long using 0 9 and P pause Be sure to include the trunk access code e g 9 in the number Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Call Forwarding Off Premise Level Aspila EX IN Available Extension Number Max 8 digits Off Premise Destination Number Default 1 9 0 Pause Press line key 1 Rec...

Page 743: ...gramming mode 2 24 07 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 24 07 01 TEL200 Dial ba...

Page 744: ... Setup to define the basic setting of each DID DISA line Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access DISA Level Aspila EX IN Available Trunk port number 1 200 Item No Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 DID DISA Dial In Mode 0 Extension number Service code specify 1 Use dial conversion table 0 22 11 02 DISA User ID 0 off 1 on 0 25 08 03 DID DISA Transfer A...

Page 745: ...1 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Trunk Port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 25 01 01 Trk Port 1 Dial In_Mode 0 Interco...

Page 746: ...d as the Automated Attendant Error Message for each trunk which is assigned as a DID DISA Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access DISA Level Aspila EX IN Available Trunk Port Number 001 200 Day Night Mode Kind of Talkie Additional data Default 1 8 0 No Message 1 VRS 2 ACI 3 SLT In case of 1 01 48 VRS message number In case of 2 01 16 ACI group number In case ...

Page 747: ...nter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Trunk Port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 25 02 01 Trk Port 1 Mode1 Talkie 0 back select ...

Page 748: ...als incorrectly or waits too long to dial The call can either disconnect 0 or Transfer to an alternate destination a ring group or voice mail When setting the DISA and DID Operating Mode you make an entry for each Night Service mode Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access DISA Level Aspila EX IN Available Trunk Port Number 001 200 Day Night Mode Incoming Grou...

Page 749: ...programming mode 2 25 03 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Trunk Port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 25 03 01 Trk Port 1...

Page 750: ...en the DISA caller calls a busy or unanswered extension The call can either disconnect 0 or Transfer to an alternate destination a ring group or voice mail When setting the DISA and DID Operating Mode you make an entry for each Night Service mode Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access DISA Level Aspila EX IN Available Trunk Port Number 001 200 Day Night Mode...

Page 751: ...gramming mode 2 25 04 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Trunk Port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 25 04 01 Trk Port 1 Mo...

Page 752: ...age For each DID DISA trunk that the VRS will answer enter the VRS message 1 48 the outside caller hears if they dial incorrectly If you enter 0 i e no error message the call reroutes according to Program 25 03 and 25 04 For each trunk you make a separate entry for each Night Service mode Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access DISA Level Aspila EX IN Availab...

Page 753: ... 25 05 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Trunk Port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 25 05 01 Trk Port 1 Mode1 Error_MSG 0...

Page 754: ...r dials the specified digit The destination can be an extension a Department Calling pilot number or the Voice Mail master number A one digit code can be assigned for each Automated Attendant message Example Message Number 01 Destination 2 Next Message Number 0 Dial 399 In this example when 2 is dialed by an outside caller the system transfers the call to 399 This means that ext 200 299 cannot rec...

Page 755: ... 2 25 06 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Guidance Attendant Message number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 25 06 01 Guidance1 ...

Page 756: ...the system sets the call as a Ring No Answer After this interval expires the call follows the pro grammed Ring No Answer routing set in Program 25 03 and 25 04 0 64800 30 25 04 03 Disconnect after DID DISA re transfer to IRG 0 64800 60 04 Calling Time to Automatic answering Telephone set 0 64800 10 05 Duration time for Guidance Message by Automatic answering telephone set 0 64800 10 06 Duration ti...

Page 757: ...ss MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 10 DISA External Paging Time This is the maximum length of an External Page placed by a DISA caller If the Page continues longer than this interval the system terminates the DISA call 0 64800 30 11 DID DISA Answer Delay Timer 0 64800 0 13 DID DISA Busy Tone Interval If a DISA caller dials a bu...

Page 758: ...or Program 25 08 DISA User ID Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 25 08 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the DISA User number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that s...

Page 759: ...em identifies the user and associates the appropriate DISA Class of Service with the call Assign the DISA Class of Service options in Program 20 14 When programming DISA Class of Service you make one entry for each Night Service mode Input Data Conditions A The DISA Class of Service cannot be 0 B You cannot use Program 20 06 to assign Class of Service to DISA trunks Feature Cross Reference Direct ...

Page 760: ...25 09 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the DISA User number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 25 09 01 DISA User1 Mode1 DISA_Class 1 ...

Page 761: ...ng in Program 14 06 Enable or disable the DISA caller s ability to dial 9 in Program 20 14 02 You assign a route to each DISA Class of Service 1 15 The system assigns a DISA Class of Service to a call based on the password the DISA caller dials When programming you make a separate entry for each Night Service Mode Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access DISA ...

Page 762: ... 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the DISA User number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 25 10 01 DISA User1 Mode1 DISA_Route No 1 ba...

Page 763: ...ss you enter in Program 21 05 and 21 06 The Toll Restriction Class assigned to a DISA call is based on the DISA Class of Service and user which is determined by the password the caller dials When programming you make a separate entry for each Night Service mode Input Data Conditions You cannot use Program 21 05 to assign Toll Restriction to DISA trunks Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System ...

Page 764: ...3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the DISA User number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 25 11 01 DISA User1 Mode1 DISA_T R_Class2 bac...

Page 765: ...DISA caller s Class of Service which is in turn determined by the password the caller dials When programming you make a separate entry for each Night Service Mode Use Program 11 09 02 to set the Alternate Trunk Access Code Use Program 14 06 to set trunk routes Input Data Conditions You cannot use Program 21 15 to assign alternate trunk routing to DISA trunks Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward S...

Page 766: ...ode 2 25 12 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the DISA User number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 25 12 01 DISA User1 Mode1 DISA_Ro...

Page 767: ...sword DISA callers must dial before the system will allow them to record listen to and or erase the VAU messages 1 9 0 6 digits fixed No setting 02 Continue Code for DISA Trunk to Trunk Program the Continue code This code is used with the Warning Tone for Long Conversation for DISA callers This allows the user to press the programmed code to continue the conversation the call If the Continue code ...

Page 768: ...System Option for DISA 1 Enter the programming mode 2 25 13 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 25 13 01 VRS_MSG_Access_ID back select 25 13 nn nnnnn ...

Page 769: ...ervice Enable or disable ARS 0 Disable 0 02 Network Outgoing Inter Digit ARS Timer With Networking this timer replaces 20 03 04 when determining if all network protocol digits have been received If ARS is enabled at Site B this timer can be pro grammed for 5 500 msec at Site A If ARS is disabled and Site B is using F Route for outbound dialing this timer should be pro grammed for 30 3 seconds at S...

Page 770: ...tomatic Route Selection Service 1 Enter the programming mode 2 26 01 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 26 01 01 ARS Service 0 Off back select 26 01 nn nnnnn ...

Page 771: ...er is controlled by the F Route table Input Data Level Aspila EX IN Available Dial Analysis Table Number 1 200 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Dial Dial Digits 16 dig its maximum No Setting 02 Service Type 0 No ARS 1 Route to Trunk Group 2 Select F Route Access 0 03 Service Number In Service Type 1 Select Trunk Group Number 0 100 0 no route In Service Type 2 F Route Time Schedule Not Used 0 500...

Page 772: ...To enter data for Program 26 02 Dial Analysis Table for ARS 1 Enter the programming mode 2 26 02 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 26 02 01 Analysis Tbl1 Dial back select 26 02 nn n...

Page 773: ... For example D041234 out dials 124 Valid entries are 0 9 Wnn wait nn seconds and P pause Each digits code counts as a digit So for example if a P was added for a pause the entry would look like D05P1234 This Dial Treatment can only be added from telephone programming Wnn Wait nn seconds P Pause in analogue trunk R Redial the initially dialed number including any modifications E End of Dial Treatme...

Page 774: ...ARS Dial Treatments 1 Enter the programming mode 2 26 03 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 26 03 01 ARS Treatment1 back select 26 03 nn nnnnn ...

Page 775: ... Automatic Route Selection Telephone Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 26 04 ARS Class of Service 1 Enter the programming mode 2 26 04 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming sec...

Page 776: ... set the mode of the system s DSS Con soles The entry you make in this option applies to all the system s DSS Consoles The available options are Regular Business Mode 0 Hotel Mode 1 ACD Monitor Mode 2 Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference l Direct Station Selection DSS Console l Hotel Motel Level Aspila EX IN Available DSS Console Number 01 32 DSS Operation Mode Default 0 Business mod...

Page 777: ...DSS Console Operating Mode 1 Enter the programming mode 2 30 01 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 30 01 01 Operation_Mode0 Business back select 30 01 nn nnnnn ...

Page 778: ... have one 24 Button DLS Console 256 maximum An extension can have a 24 Button DLS Console in addition to 110 Button DSS Consoles When programming each extension DSS Console p combination is called a Console Number There are 32 Console Numbers 1 32 You assign Console Numbers to extensions When entering data you normally make the assignment for Console Number 1 first Input Data Conditions 24 button ...

Page 779: ...ogramming mode 2 30 02 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the DSS number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 30 02 01 DSS1 Ext Number bac...

Page 780: ...g although the DSS function will work correctly If you are programming the system from the extension to which the DSS Console is connected either by phone or using the Web or PC Program you may need to unplug the DSS and plug it back in to reset the console s lamping Input Data Index 1 Index 2 Function Number List 1 General functional level 00 99 Level Aspila EX SA Available DSS Console Number 01 ...

Page 781: ...d Forwarded state 14 Call Forward Both ring Slow Blink Red Forwarding state Rapid Blink Red Forwarded state 15 Follow me Rapid Blink Red Setting state Slow Blink Red Set ed state 16 Call Forward to Station Slow Blink Red Forwarding state Rapid Blink Red Forwarded state 17 Call Forward to Device Slow Blink Red Forwarding state Rapid Blink Red Forwarded state 18 Text message setup Message Numbers 01...

Page 782: ...8 Message Waiting None 39 Room monitoring Rapid Blink Red Under monitored Slow Blink Red Under monitoring 40 Handset transmission cut off Red On Transmission cut off 41 Buzzer Extension Number Red On Transmission side Rapid Blink Red Receiver side 42 Boss Secretary call Extension Number Red On Boss Secretary mode 43 Series call None 44 Common Hold None 45 Exclusive None 46 Department Group With dr...

Page 783: ...ne 63 Outgoing Call without CLIP ISDN Red On Active 64 Key pad facility Red On Active 65 Transfer During Conver sation ISDN 66 CTI Red On CTI active 67 Mail Box Extension Number or Department Group Number Rapid Blink Red New message received Red On There are messages Slow Blink Red The message store regulation is under setup 68 Voice Mail Service 0 Skip 1 Back Skip 2 Monitor 2 In case of monitor m...

Page 784: ...l Extension Number or Pilot Number Red On Access to voice mail Rapid Blink Red Existing new message 78 Conversation Recording In Skin Voice Mail Rapid Blink Red Recording 79 Automated Attednant In Skin Voice Mail Extension Number or Pilot Number Red On Setup All calls Rapid Blink Red Setup No Answer calls Slow Blink Red Setup Busy calls Wink Red Busy No answer calls Function Number Function Additi...

Page 785: ... Assignment 1 Enter the programming mode 2 30 03 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the DSS number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 30...

Page 786: ...DSS Console Telephone Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 30 04 Alternate DSS Console Extension Assignment 1 Enter the programming mode 2 30 04 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the DSS number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR P...

Page 787: ...ule ACD DSS 0 7 0 Off 06 ACD Agent Log Out ACD DSS 0 7 5 IL 07 ACD Agent Log In ACD DSS 0 7 4 IR 08 ACD Agent Emergency ACD DSS 0 7 6 IW 09 Hotel Status Code 1 Hotel DSS 0 7 7 On 10 Hotel Status Code 2 Hotel DSS 0 7 1 FL 11 Hotel Status Code 3 Hotel DSS 0 7 2 WK 12 Hotel Status Code 4 Hotel DSS 0 7 3 RW 13 Hotel Status Code 5 Hotel DSS 0 7 5 IL 14 Hotel Status Code 6 Hotel DSS 0 7 3 RW 15 Hotel St...

Page 788: ...Program 30 DSS DLS Console Setup 30 05 DSS Console Lamp Table 782 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual Conditions 24 button DSS consoles cannot be daisy chained ...

Page 789: ... Assignment 1 Enter the programming mode 2 30 02 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the DSS number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 30...

Page 790: ...your entry press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor 4 Enter characters G I g i 4 After selecting your entry press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor 5 Enter characters J L j l 5 After selecting your entry press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor 6 Enter ch...

Page 791: ...o Item Input Data Default Description Related Program 01 All Call Paging Zone Name Up to 12 Characters Assign a name to each All Call Internal Paging zone The system shows the names you program on the telephone displays 11 12 19 31 02 02 02 Page Announcement Duration 0 64800 Sec 1200 This timer sets the maximum length of Page announcements 03 Paging answer wait ing timer 0 64800 Sec 90 Paging answ...

Page 792: ...ystem Options for Internal External Paging 1 Enter the programming mode 2 31 01 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 31 01 01 All_PG_Name ALL GROUP back select 31 01 nn nnnnn ...

Page 793: ...aging Group Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Paging Internal Level Aspila EX IN Available Extension Number Max 8 digits Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Internal Paging Group Number Assign extensions to Internal Paging Groups i e Page Zones The system allows up to 64 Internal Paging Groups An extension can be in only one Inter nal Paging Group 0 64 0 no setting 0 02 Internal Al...

Page 794: ...g mode 2 31 02 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 31 02 01 TEL200 INT_PG_GP_No 0...

Page 795: ...ight scroll Soft Key to move the cursor 4 Enter characters G I g i 4 After selecting your entry press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor 5 Enter characters J L j l 5 After selecting your entry press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor 6 Enter characters M O m o 6 After selecting your entry press the next...

Page 796: ...ight Internal Paging Group Number 01 64 Item No Item Input Data Default Description 01 Internal Paging Group Name Up to 12 Characters Assign names to Internal Paging Groups i e Page Zones The system shows the names you program on the telephone displays 02 Internal Paging Splash Tone 0 Ordinary volume 1 Mute 2 No tone 0 Allow an extension to have normal 0 muted 1 or no 2 Internal Paging alert beeps...

Page 797: ...3 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Internal Paging Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 10 03 01 Paging 1 PG_GP_Name GR...

Page 798: ... are numbers 1 8 The NTCPU s zone is number 9 To simplify programming and troubleshooting always make the External Paging Zone Group the same number as the External Paging zone i e 1 1 2 2 etc Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Paging External Level Aspila EX IN Available External Speaker Number 1 9 Paging Group Number Default 0 8 0 no setting Speaker 1 PGDAD 1 Group 1 Speaker 2 PG...

Page 799: ...1 04 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the External Speaker number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL UME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 31 04 01 SPK 1 Paging_Zone_GP1 b...

Page 800: ...trunk port 1 200 you make a separate entry for each External Paging zone 1 9 When programming the zones on the PGD adapter are numbers 1 8 The NTCPU s zone is number 9 For UNA ringing you make a separate entry for each Night Service mode Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Night Service Paging External Level Aspila EX IN Available Trunk port number 1 200 External Speaker Number 1 9 ...

Page 801: ...31 05 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 31 05 01 Trunk1 SPK 1Mod1 0 No back select ...

Page 802: ... Tone Before Paging Use this option to enabled or disable splash tone before Pag ing over an external zone If enabled the system broadcasts a splash tone before the External Paging announcement 0 No tone 1 Splash tone 2 Chime tone 2 02 Broadcast Splash Tone After Paging Use this option to enabled or disable splash tone after Paging over an external zone If enabled the system broadcasts a splash to...

Page 803: ...3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the External Speaker number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL UME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 31 06 01 SPK 1 PG_Start_Tone 2 Chime ...

Page 804: ...l Paging Zone 0 8 to an Internal Paging Zone 0 64 for Combined Paging When an extension user makes a Combined Page they simultaneously broadcast into both the External and Internal Zone Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Paging External Paging Internal Level Aspila EX IN Available External Paging Group Number 0 8 0 All external paging Internal paging group Number Default 0 64 0 All...

Page 805: ...07 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Page Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 31 07 01 PG Group 1 Internal_PG GP_No 1 b...

Page 806: ...em will play Background Music over the zone when it is idle When programming the zones on the PGD adapter are numbers 1 8 The NTCPU s zone is number 9 Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Background Music Paging External Level Aspila EX IN Available External Speaker Number 1 9 Input Data Description Default 0 Disable 1 Enable Use this option to allow or prevent the External Paging zo...

Page 807: ...1 08 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the External Speaker number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL UME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 31 08 01 SPK 1 BGM 0 No back sel...

Page 808: ...lt 01 Door Box Answer Time A keyset user must answer Door Box chimes within this interval 0 64800 30 02 Door Lock Cancel Time When a single line 2500 type telephone user hook flashes or a keyset user presses the FLASH key while talking to a Door Box the strike stays open for this interval 0 64800 10 03 Off Premise Call Forward by Door Box Dis connect Timer Define the conversation period for an Off...

Page 809: ...2 01 Door Box Timers 1 Enter the programming mode 2 32 01 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 32 01 01 DH_Ans Time 30 Sec back select 32 01 nn nnnnn ...

Page 810: ... Use Program 32 02 Door Box Ring Assignments to assign the extension which will ring when a caller presses the associated Door Box s call button Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Door Box Level Aspila EX SA Available Door Box Number 1 8 Day Night Mode 1 8 Door Box Ring Group Number Extension Number Default 01 32 Max 8 digits No setting ...

Page 811: ...ode 2 32 02 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Door Box number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 32 02 01 DOOR 1 Mode1 TEL 01 back ...

Page 812: ...m 80 01 Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Door Box Level Aspila EX IN Available Door Box Number 1 8 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Chime Pattern 0 No ringing tone 1 Door Box ring 1 2 Door Box ring 2 3 Door Box ring 3 4 Door Box ring 4 5 Door Box ring 5 6 Door Box ring 6 Door Box 1 1 Door Box 2 2 Door Box 3 3 Door Box 4 4 Door Box 5 5 Door Box 6 6 Door Box 7 1 Door Box 8 1 02 C...

Page 813: ... 03 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Door Box number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 32 03 01 DOOR 1 Chime_Pattern 1 Ring1 back...

Page 814: ...m 33 01 ACI Port Type Setup to set the function of each software port on an Ana logue Communications Interface Each ACI software port can have only one function input output or none Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Analogue Communications Interface ACI Level Aspila EX IN Available ACI Port Number 01 96 ACI Type Default 0 No Setting 1 Input 2 Input Output 2 ...

Page 815: ...nter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the ACI port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 33 01 01 ACI Port1 ACI_Type 2 In Out back select ...

Page 816: ...I port can only be in one group Also use this program to set the ACI port s priority When a call comes into the ACI Department Group it connects to the ACI port in order of their priority A higher priority port e g 1 receives calls before a lower priority port e g 6 Input Data Default Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Analogue Communications Interface ACI Level Aspila EX IN Available ACI Por...

Page 817: ... 2 33 02 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the ACI port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 33 02 01 ACI Port1 ACI_Group 1 back s...

Page 818: ...rt number 1 200 Item No Item Input Data Default Description Related Program 01 DID E M Start Signaling 0 2nd dial tone 1 Wink 2 Immediate 3 Delay 1 Set the start signaling mode for DID and tie trunks DID and tie trunks can use either immediate start or wink start signaling 22 02 02 DID E M Incoming Sig naling Type 0 Dial Pulse 1 PB DTMF 0 For DID and tie trunks use this option to set the trunk s s...

Page 819: ...Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the trunk port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 34 01 01 Trk Port 1 Signal_Type 1 Wink back se...

Page 820: ...ce to a tie line there are 15 tie line Classes of Service The Class of Service options are defined in Program 20 14 For each tie line you make a separate entry for each Night Service mode Input Data Conditions You cannot use Program 20 06 to assign Class of Service to tie lines Feature Cross Reference Tie Lines Level Aspila EX IN Available Trunk port number 1 200 Day Night Mode Class Default Relat...

Page 821: ... 02 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the trunk port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 34 02 01 Trk Port 1 Mode1 Class_No 1 bac...

Page 822: ...the trunk group route 1 100 chosen when a user seizes a tie line and dials 9 Set Trunk Group Routing in Program 14 07 If the system has Automatic Route Selection dialing 9 accesses ARS You make a separate entry for each tie line for each Night Service Mode Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Tie Lines Level Aspila EX IN Available Trunk Port Number 001 200 Day Night Mode Route table ...

Page 823: ...de 2 34 03 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the trunk port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 34 03 01 Trk Port 1 Mode1 Route_T...

Page 824: ...ach tie line There are 15 Toll Restriction Classes which are defined in Programs 21 05 and 21 06 For each tie line you make a separate Toll Restriction Class entry for each Night Service mode Input Data Conditions You cannot use Program 20 06 to assign Toll Restriction to tie lines Feature Cross Reference Tie Lines Level Aspila EX IN Available Trunk Port Number 001 200 Day Night Mode Toll Restrict...

Page 825: ...2 34 04 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the trunk port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 34 04 01 Trk Port 1 Mode1 T R_Class_...

Page 826: ...und trunk e g dialed from a tie line For each inbound trunk group enable or disable access to each CO trunk group Input Data Default Conditions None Level Aspila EX IN Available Incoming trunk group Number 001 100 Outgoing trunk group Number Input Data 1 100 0 Enable 1 Disable Outgoing Trunk Groups Incoming Trunk Groups 1 2 3 4 97 98 99 100 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 4 0...

Page 827: ...programming mode 2 34 05 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Incoming Trunk Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 34 05 01 ...

Page 828: ...llows the system to ignore such numbers for a call If individual extensions do not want to receive an incoming call you could delete all of the digits including the extension number Add Digit If a tie line network requires additional digits to reroute the call to a location the digits for the location can be added to the received digits Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Tie Lines ...

Page 829: ...06 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Incoming Trunk Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 34 06 01 INC Group 1 Delete_Dig...

Page 830: ...e Timer to define the system service tone timers Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Tie Lines Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Input Data Default 01 ODT SRT Mark method 0 64800 3 02 ODT SRT Wink start method 0 64800 0 03 1st digit Pause LDT 0 64800 3 04 Leased Line Guard LDT 0 64800 0 05 Trunk answer detect timer for E M E1 0 64800 30 ...

Page 831: ... M Tie Line Timer 1 Enter the programming mode 2 34 07 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 34 07 01 1st Digit_M O 3 Sec back select 34 07 nn nnnnn ...

Page 832: ...34 08 Toll Restirction Data for E M Tie Lines to define the toll restriction data for E M tie lines This data should be defined if Toll Tie Line Restriction is enabled in Program 21 05 13 Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Tie Lines Level Aspila EX IN Available Class of Service 01 15 Table No Dial Data Default Related Program 01 20 Up to 10 digits No setting 21 05 13 ...

Page 833: ...ing mode 2 34 08 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Deny Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 34 08 01 Deny TBL1 Dial_Dat...

Page 834: ...ANI Delimiter Code 0 0 34 09 02 02 Delimiter Dial Code This option defines the character telco uses as a delimiter see entries 1 9 in Item 1 above Valid entries are 0 9 and 1 9 0 34 09 01 03 Route Setup of Receive Dial This option specifies the source of the data the system uses to route incoming ANI DNIS calls 0 Fixed Route Item 08 1 Routes on Received DNIS or Address Data 2 Routes on Received AN...

Page 835: ...epartment Group pilot number the voice mail master number or a trunk ring group Start 0 100 1900 End 0 99 1999 Start 1000 End 1199 Start 0 End 0 13 04 07 Routing on ANI DNIS Error This option lets you determine how the sys tem will handle an ANI DNIS call if a data error is detected in the incoming data string 0 Play busy tone to caller 1 Route the caller to the ring group specified in Program 25 ...

Page 836: ...nter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Class of Service number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL UME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 34 09 01 FCTN Cls1 Format 0 Address back...

Page 837: ...SB NTCPU 3 Reserve 4 CTA CTU 0 02 Output Destination Number This option specifies the SMDR printer output port CTA CTU port number Up to 8 digit No setting 03 Header Language Specify the language in which the SMDR header should be printed English German French Italian Spanish 0 04 Omit Digits The number of digits entered in this option do not print on the SMDR report For example if the entry is 10...

Page 838: ...gramming mode 2 35 01 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the SMDR port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 35 01 01 SMDR Port1 Out...

Page 839: ...ll calls or just calls dialed using the PBX trunk access code 0 Not Displayed 1 Displayed 1 03 Trunk Number or Name Select whether the system should display the trunk name 0 or the number 1 on SMDR reports If this option is set to 1 Program 35 02 14 must be set to 0 0 Name 1 Number 1 04 Summary Daily Set this option to 1 to have the SMDR report provide a daily summary at midnight every night 0 Not...

Page 840: ...Not Displayed 1 Displayed 0 11 Walking Toll Restriction Table Number 0 Not Displayed 1 Displayed 1 12 DID Table Name Output 0 Not Displayed 1 Displayed 0 13 CLI Output When DID to Trunk 0 Not Displayed 1 Displayed 14 Date Determine whether the date should be dis played on SMDR reports This option must be set to 0 if the trunk name is set to be dis played in Program 35 02 03 0 Not Displayed 1 Displ...

Page 841: ... 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the SMDR port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 35 02 01 SMDR Port1 T R Call 1 Display back ...

Page 842: ...MDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group Description Use Program 35 03 SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group to assign the SMDR port for each trunk group Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Station Message Detail Recording Trunk Group Routing Level Aspila EX IN Available Trunk Group Number 1 100 SMDR Port No Default 1 8 1 ...

Page 843: ...ming mode 2 35 03 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Trunk Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 35 03 01 TRK Group 1 SMDR...

Page 844: ...ter data for Program 35 04 SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups 1 Enter the programming mode 2 35 04 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Extension Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL UME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item numbe...

Page 845: ... disabled 1 Account Codes optional 2 Account Codes required but not verified 3 Account Codes required and verified 0 02 Forced Account Code Toll Call Setup Use this option enable Account Codes for all calls or just toll calls for mode 2 or 3 in Item 01 above 0 Account Codes for toll and local calls 1 Account Codes just for toll calls 0 03 Account Codes for Incom ing Calls Use this option to allow ...

Page 846: ...ter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Class of Service number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL UME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 35 05 01 FCTN Cls1 Account_Code 0 None ba...

Page 847: ...s into the Verified Account Code list You can enter up to 2000 codes from 3 16 digits long using the characters 0 9 or Use the FLASH key to enter a wild card For example the entry FLASH234 means the user can enter 0234 9234 Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Account Codes Level Aspila EX IN Available Verified Account Code Bin Number 1 2000 Verified Account Code Default 1 9 0 Wild c...

Page 848: ... 06 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Verified Account Code Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 35 06 01 Table1 Verifie...

Page 849: ... Data Default Description 01 Exclusive Channel for Voice Mail 0 16 0 Specify the number of channels of DSPDB which voice mail occupies 02 Time Stamp 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 03 Conversation Recording Mode for After Transfer 0 Not Continued 1 Continue 1 Use this program to set up whether after Hold Transfer continues recording when recording conversation 04 Automated Attendant Voice Mail for No Existin...

Page 850: ...01 Voice Mail Basic Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 40 01 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 40 01 01 VM_Channel 0 back select 40 01 nn nnnnn ...

Page 851: ...ram to set the box number and password linked to the extension number or pilot number for each mailbox Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Mail Level Aspila EX SA Available DSPDB Message Box Number 01 300 Item No Item Input Data Default Description 01 Mailbox Number Dial Up to 8 digits No set ting A mailbox number should use the same number of an extension 02 Mailbox Password ...

Page 852: ... number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Message Box number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 40 02 01 Message Box1 Mail_Box_No back select 40 02 nn...

Page 853: ... answering operation of the Voice Mail DSPDB Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Mail Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Voice Mail Recording Time 1 to 10 minutes 1 02 A guidance message in case record ing is not allowed 0 Fixed Guidance Message 1 Answer Message of Mailbox 0 03 A response message is automatically sent out when busy 0 Disable 1 Enab...

Page 854: ...3 Message Recording Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 40 03 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 40 03 01 Recording_Time1 back select 40 03 nn nnnnn ...

Page 855: ... DSPDB Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Mail Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Input Data Default Description 01 The operation mode when des tination is not defined 0 Temporary Mailbox 1 Callback operation 1 02 Temporary Mailbox Number 0 300 0 Set up the temporary mailbox number 03 Live Recording Display 0 Enable 1 Disablee 1 Enables or disables the sys tem s abilit...

Page 856: ...ve Recording Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 40 04 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 40 04 01 After_Rec Mode 1 CallBk back select 40 04 nn nnnnn ...

Page 857: ...a Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Mail Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Maximum number of outgoing call simultaneously 0 16 1 02 Trunk Route Number 0 100 1 03 ISDN Calling Party Number 1 0 max 6 digits No setting 04 Call interval for intercom call 1 30 minutes 10 05 Call interval for external call 1 30 minutes 10 06 Maximum number of intercom call 1 100...

Page 858: ...5 Call Information Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 40 05 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 40 05 01 Max OTG Call 1 back select 40 05 nn nnnnn ...

Page 859: ...dant Data Setup to define the outside lines to use the automated attendant recording operation of the Voice Mail DSPDB Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Mail Level Aspila EX IN Available Trunk Port Number 1 200 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Operation Mode 0 Automated Attendant 1 Not Used 0 02 Guidance Message Number 0 48 0 03 Message Box Number For Le...

Page 860: ...gramming mode 2 40 06 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 40 06 01 Trunk1 Mode1 OPR M...

Page 861: ...ge to be used for the voice mail Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Mail Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Voice Mail Although the system allows this option to be changed in programming the lan guage will only change if the DSPDB has the firmware which provides the newly selected language 0 Japanese 1 English ...

Page 862: ...7 Voice Prompt Language Assignment for System 1 Enter the programming mode 2 40 07 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 40 07 01 SYS_Lang Japanese 1 back select 40 07 nn nnnnn ...

Page 863: ...e to be used for the mailboxes Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Mail Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Mailboxes Although the system allows this option to be changed in programming the lan guage will only change if the DSPDB has the firmware which provides the newly selected language 0 Japanese 1 English 2 G...

Page 864: ...oice Prompt Language Assignment for Mailboxes 1 Enter the programming mode 2 40 08 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 40 08 01 MAIL_Lang Japanese 1 back select 40 08 nn nnnnn ...

Page 865: ...ltiple Address Group Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 40 09 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s progr...

Page 866: ... such as You have a message 0 Not Used 1 Used 1 02 General Message Number This item assigns the VAU message number to be used as the General Message 0 48 0 No General Message Service 0 03 VRS No Answer Destination This item assigns the transferred Ring Group when the VRS is unanswered after Call Forwarding with Personal Greeting Message 0 100 Incoming Ring Group Number 0 No Setting 04 VRS No Answe...

Page 867: ...Voice Announcement Service Option 1 Enter the programming mode 2 40 10 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 40 10 01 VAU Fixed Msg 1 Use back select 40 10 nn nnnnn ...

Page 868: ...Feature Cross Reference Voice Response System VRS Telephone Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 40 11 Pre Amble Message Assignment 1 Enter the programming mode 2 40 11 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exite...

Page 869: ...Enter the programming mode 2 41 10 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Input Data Default Description 01 System Supervisory Extension Up to 8...

Page 870: ...on will work as an ACD agent extension in the following cases The trunk belonging to an ACD group receives an incoming call while an ACD agent is logged in An extension calls or transfers a call to an ACD group using the ACD group pilot number An incoming call is received with a DID DISA number which is assigned as an ACD pilot number Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Ca...

Page 871: ...e 2 41 02 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 41 02 01 TEL301 Mode1 Group 0 back ...

Page 872: ... Also use this program to assign an Incoming Trunk Ring Group as priority or normal Use Program 41 05 and 41 06 to set up the Work Schedules and Work Periods for trunks Use Program 41 07 to assign the Work Schedules to the days of the week Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Call Distribution ACD Ring Groups Level Aspila EX SA Available Incoming Ring Group Number 1 100 ACD...

Page 873: ...mode 2 41 03 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Incoming Ring Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 41 03 01 INC Group1 Mo...

Page 874: ...ike all other agents An ACD Group can have only one supervisor In addition an extension can be a supervisor for only one ACD Group Input Data Conditions If you assign an extension as a ACD Group Supervisor in this program you cannot program the same extension as a System Supervisor in Program 41 01 01 Feature Cross Reference Automatic Call Distribution ACD Level Aspila EX SA Available ACD Group No...

Page 875: ...er the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the ACD Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 41 04 01 ACD Group1 GP_Supervisor back select 41 0...

Page 876: ...ogram 41 07 This is the same program used by the Trunk Work Schedules ACD extensions can log in only during their work period ACD extensions will receive the follow ing types of calls when they are logged in l ACD Call on a Trunk If the incoming ring group is assigned in the operating time Program 41 03 and 41 06 ACD Pilot Number Call Any time if ACD extensions are available Input Data Conditions ...

Page 877: ...the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Time Pattern number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 41 05 01 Time Pttn 1 Mode1 Start_Time 00 00 back s...

Page 878: ...e start and stop times for each of the eight Work Periods Once you set up the schedules assign them to days of the week in Program 41 07 This is the same pro gram used by the ACD Agent Work Schedules Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Call Distribution ACD Level Aspila EX SA Available ACD Work Schedule Time Pattern Number 1 4 Work Period Mode Number Start Time End Time De...

Page 879: ...number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Time Pattern number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 41 06 01 Time Pttn 1 Mode1 Start_Time 00 00 back selec...

Page 880: ...k Schedules 1 4 to days of the week The assignments you make in this program apply to both the ACD Agent Work Schedules Program 41 05 and the Trunk Work Schedules Program 41 06 Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Call Distribution ACD Level Aspila EX SA Available Day Number Time Pattern Default 1 Sunday 0 4 0 No ACD 0 2 Monday 3 Tuesday 4 Wednesday 5 Thursday 6 Friday 7 Sa...

Page 881: ...CD Weekly Schedule Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 41 07 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 41 07 01 Sunday Pattn0 back select 41 07 nn nnnnn ...

Page 882: ...Reference Automatic Call Distribution ACD Level Aspila EX SA Available ACD Group No 01 64 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Overflow Operation Mode 0 No overflow 1 Overflow with No Announcement 2 No Overflow with First Announcement Only 3 No Overflow with First Second Announcements 4 Overflow with First Announcement Only 5 Overflow with First Second Announcement 6 Not used 7 Not used 8 No Overflo...

Page 883: ...he number of the item you want to program 4 Select the ACD Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 41 08 01 ACD Group1 O Flow_Mode 0 None 1 back select 4...

Page 884: ... Overflow Table Setting to define the ACD group to which a call will be transferred when overflow occurs Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Call Distribution ACD Level Aspila EX SA Available ACD Group No 01 64 Priority Order Number Transfer ACD Group Number With Overflow Default 1 7 0 65 0 No setting 65 In Skin Voice Mail Integration 0 ...

Page 885: ...Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the ACD Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 41 09 01 ACD Group1 Order1 ACD_Group 0 back sel...

Page 886: ...ed when the delay announcement source and options are assigned as PGDAD in Program 41 08 Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Call Distribution ACD Level Aspila EX SA Available ACD Group No 01 64 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 1st Delay Announcement PGDAD Port Number 0 96 0 No setting 0 02 2nd Delay Announcement PGDAD Port Number 0 96 0 No setting 0 03 1st Delay Announc...

Page 887: ...ming mode 2 41 10 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the ACD Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 41 10 01 ACD Group1 No 1 AC...

Page 888: ...when the delay announcement source and options are assigned as VRS in Program 41 08 Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Call Distribution ACD Level Aspila EX SA Available ACD Group No 01 64 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Delay Message Start Time 0 64800 0 02 1st Delay Message Number 0 49 0 No message 49 Fixed message 0 03 1st Delay Message Sending Count 0 255 0 04 2nd ...

Page 889: ...mode 2 41 11 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the ACD Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 41 11 01 ACD Group1 Delay_Msg_St...

Page 890: ...n the setting in Program 41 03 02 The night announcement function is not available for ACD pilot number call Input Data Conditions The night announcement function is not available for ACD pilot number call Feature Cross Reference Automatic Call Distribution ACD Level Aspila EX SA Available ACD Group Number 01 64 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Night Announcement Source Type 0 ACI 1 VRS DSPDB 0 ...

Page 891: ...Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the ACD Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 41 12 01 ACD Group1 NT Source 0 ACI back select...

Page 892: ...e the VRS mes sage number to be used as the night announcement This program is activated when the night announcement source is assigned as VRS in Program 41 12 Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Call Distribution ACD Level Aspila EX SA Available ACD Group No 01 64 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 VRS Message Number 0 48 0 No message 0 02 Tone Kind at Message Interval 0 ...

Page 893: ...ng mode 2 41 13 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the ACD Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 41 13 01 ACD Group1 VRS Msg N...

Page 894: ...on when group supervisory extension is busy 0 02 Wrap up mode 0 After wrap up mode key is pressed 1 After call is finished automatically 0 03 ACD Priority for overflow calls 1 0 Own group priority 1 Priority order by Program 41 03 03 0 04 Automatic Answer in Headset Mode 0 off 1 on 0 05 Not used 06 Transfer to ACD extension while 2nd delay announcement 0 Transfer to ACD extension 1 Not transfer to...

Page 895: ...mming mode 2 41 14 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the ACD Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 41 14 01 ACD Group1 EMG Ca...

Page 896: ... assign the options for Audible Indica tion for Log Out Off Duty mode for each ACD group Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Call Distribution ACD Level Aspila EX SA Available ACD Group No 01 64 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 The number of calls in ACD Queue to activate Alarm information 0 200 0 No Alarm 0 02 The interval time of Alarm information 0 64800 Sec 0 ...

Page 897: ...15 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the ACD Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 41 15 01 ACD Group1 ACD Alarm 0 back selec...

Page 898: ...e Cross Reference Automatic Call Distribution ACD Level Aspila EX SA Available ACD Group No 01 64 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Number of Calls in Queue Define the maximum num ber of calls allowed in the ACD queue before overflow occurs 0 200 0 No limitation 0 02 Operation Mode for ACD Queue Define how the system should handle calls when the number of calls in queue exceeds the threshold 0 Th...

Page 899: ...nter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the ACD Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 41 16 01 ACD Group1 Queue Limit 0 back select 41...

Page 900: ...tup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 41 17 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section Leve...

Page 901: ...AIC Table No 001 512 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 ACD Agent Identity Code Up to 4 digits No setting 02 Default ACD Group Number 0 64 0 No setting 0 03 ACD Group Number in Mode 1 0 64 0 No setting 0 04 ACD Group Number in Mode 2 0 64 0 No setting 0 05 ACD Group Number in Mode 3 0 64 0 No setting 0 06 ACD Group Number in Mode 4 0 64 0 No setting 0 07 ACD Group Number in Mode 5 0 64 0 No settin...

Page 902: ...3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Agent Identity Code AIC number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 41 18 01 AIC TBL 1 AIC Code bac...

Page 903: ...erflow options Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Call Distribution ACD Voice Response Service VRS Level Aspila EX SA Available ACD Group No 01 64 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Delay Message Start Timer 0 64800 0 02 Mailbox Number for 1st Announcement Message Dial Up to 8 digits No Setting 03 1st Delay Message Sending Count 0 255 0 04 Mailbox Number for 2nd Announcem...

Page 904: ... 2 41 19 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the ACD Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 41 19 01 ACD Group1 Delay_Msg_Strt0 ...

Page 905: ...ailable Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Answering Message Mode for Wake Up Call Hotel Mode 0 MOH 1 VRS Message 2 VRS Message Time 0 02 Wake Up Call Message Assignment VRS Message for Wake Up Calls You ll need to make an entry for this program if you have selected option 2 or 3 in Item 1 above 0 48 0 No setting 0 03 Wake Up Call No Answer 0 No transfer 1 Transfer to the Operator 0 04 Setup messa...

Page 906: ... Options for Hotel Motel 1 Enter the programming mode 2 42 01 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 42 01 01 Answer Message0 Hold Tone back select 42 01 nn nnnnn ...

Page 907: ...t Data Default 01 Hotel Mode If you want an extension to operate in the Hotel Motel mode 1 If you want the tele phone to operate in the business mode enter 0 0 Normal 1 Hotel 0 02 Toll Restriction Class When Check In Assign an extension s Toll Restriction Class when it is checked in The system has 15 Toll Restriction Classes 1 15 The entry you make in this option affects the telephone in all Night...

Page 908: ... 02 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 42 02 01 TEL200 Hotel Mode 0 Normal back ...

Page 909: ...ptions refer to Programs 20 06 20 14 Input Data Level Aspila EX IN Available Class of Service Number 01 15 Item No Item Input Data Default Class 01 Class 02 15 01 Check In Operation 0 Off 1 On 0 0 02 Check Out Operation 0 Off 1 On 0 0 03 Room Status Output 0 Off 1 On 0 0 04 DND Setting for Other Extension 0 Off 1 On 0 0 05 Wake up Call Setting for Other Extension 0 Off 1 On 0 0 06 Room Status Chan...

Page 910: ... the Class of Service number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL UME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 12 SLT Room Monitor Enable 1 or disable 0 a single line telephone s ability to use Room Monitor ...

Page 911: ... each Department Calling Group 1 64 you enter the destination for each single digit code 1 9 0 The destination can be any code up to four digits long such as an extension number or access code Input Data Conditions The one digit codes you assign in this program wait until the Interdigit timer expires before executing Feature Cross Reference Hotel Motel Level Aspila EX IN Available Department Exten...

Page 912: ... 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Department Telephone Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 42 04 01 TEL Group1 1digit ...

Page 913: ...l feature Input Data Conditions Room Status Reports require a DCI CTA and a compatible printer Refer to Data Communications Interface DCI in the feature section for information Feature Cross Reference Hotel Motel Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Output Port Type 0 No setting 1 CTA 0 02 Output Destination Number Up to 8 digit Extension number which CTA CTU is equipped...

Page 914: ...l Room Status Printer 1 Enter the programming mode 2 42 05 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 42 05 01 Output Port Type 0 No back select 42 05 nn nnnnn ...

Page 915: ...ion ARS F Route Telephone Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 44 01 System Options for ARS F Route 1 Enter the programming mode 2 44 01 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming sect...

Page 916: ...Type 2 ARS F Route select The number is controlled by ARS F Route table Additional data Assign the ARS F Route table number for Program 44 05 If the ARS F Route Time sched ule is not used Assign the ARS F Route selection number for Program 44 04 If the ARS F Route Time schedule is used Service Type 3 Dial Extension Analyze Table select The total length of the number exceeds more than 5 digits Addi...

Page 917: ...LUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 03 Additional Data 1 0 255 Delete Digit 255 delete all digit 2 Program 44 01 0 0 500 ARS F Route table Number 0 No setting Refer to Program 44 05 Program 44 01 1 0 500 ARS F ...

Page 918: ... Aspila EX IN Available Extension Table Area Number 1 4 Dial Analysis Table Number 1 252 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Dial Up to 24 digits No setting 02 ARS F Route Select Table Num ber Program 44 01 0 0 500 ARS F Route Table Number Program 44 05 Program 44 01 1 0 500 ARS F Route select table Number Program 44 04 0 Item No Item Input Data Default 03 ARS F Route Select table Num ber Program 4...

Page 919: ...he programming mode 2 44 03 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Extension Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL UME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section Item No It...

Page 920: ...Instructions To enter data for Program 44 04 ARS F Route Selection for Time Schedule 1 Enter the programming mode 2 44 04 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the ARS F Route Selection number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to en...

Page 921: ...d with a beep tone Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route Level Aspila EX IN Available ARS F Route Table Number 1 500 Priority Number 1 4 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Trunk Group Number 0 100 255 0 No setting 255 Extension Call 0 02 Delete Digits 0 255 255 Delete all 0 03 Additional Dial Number 0 1000 0 04 Beep Tone 0 off 1 on 0 05 Gain Table...

Page 922: ... number of the item you want to program 4 Select the ARS F Route Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 44 05 01 F route TBL1 PRI1 TRK GP 0 back select ...

Page 923: ... Additional Dial Table 1 Enter the programming mode 2 44 06 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Additional Dial Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that se...

Page 924: ...ARS F Route The Tandem Gain Table is activated which is assigned in Program 44 05 The Tandem Gain Table follows the Incoming transmit and Incoming receive settings for incoming line and Outgoing transmit and Outgoing receive settings for the outgoing line Note For the ARS F Route call in the above case CODEC gain in Program 14 01 02 and 14 01 03 are not activated Input Data Conditions None Feature...

Page 925: ...e 2 44 07 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Gain Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 44 07 01 Gain TBL 1 INC Transmit 3...

Page 926: ...ern consists of 20 time settings Input Data Default All Schedule Pattern 0 00 0 00 Mode 1 Example Pattern 1 Time Number01 00 00 08 00 Mode 3 Time Number02 08 00 18 00 Mode 1 Time Number03 18 00 22 00 Mode 2 Time Number04 22 00 00 00 Mode 3 Pattern 2 Time Number 01 0 00 0 00 Mode 2 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route Level Aspila EX IN Available Schedule Pa...

Page 927: ...8 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Time Pattern number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 44 08 01 Time Pttn 1 T Zone01 Start 00 0...

Page 928: ...ARS F Route to define a weekly schedule for using ARS F Route Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route Level Aspila EX IN Available Day Number Schedule Pattern Number Default 1 Sunday 1 10 Pattern 1 2 Monday 1 10 Pattern 1 3 Tuesday 1 10 Pattern 1 4 Wednesday 1 10 Pattern 1 5 Thursday 1 10 Pattern 1 6 Friday 1 10 Pattern 1 7 Saturday 1 10 Pattern 1 ...

Page 929: ...9 Weekly Schedule for ARS F Route 1 Enter the programming mode 2 44 09 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 44 09 01 Sunday Pattern 1 back select 44 09 nn nnnnn ...

Page 930: ...tomatic Route Selection ARS F Route Telephone Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 44 10 Holiday Schedule for ARS F Route 1 Enter the programming mode 2 44 10 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that ser...

Page 931: ...cess the Call Screening commands 1 extension number sent from the Voice Mail You should normally enable this option to allow for Voice Mail Call Screening Disable this option if your sys tem has been modified so that extensions begin with the digit 1 e g 101 102 etc Also see the Flexible System Numbering feature 0 Off 1 On 1 04 Park and Page Enable disable the system s ability to pro cess the Voic...

Page 932: ...o enter data for Program 45 01 Voice Mail Integration Options 1 Enter the programming mode 2 45 01 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 45 01 01 STG No of VM 0 back select 45 01 nn nnn...

Page 933: ...up to customize the NSL options for Voice Mail integra tion Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Mail Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Send DTMF Tone or 6KD Message 0 Sending DTMF Tone to SLT VM Port 1 Sending 6KD Message to Serial Port 0 02 Forced Send Dial Tone 0 Normal 1 Forced 0 03 Send 5IA Message 0 Off 1 On 0 ...

Page 934: ...02 NSL Option Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 45 02 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 45 02 01 DTMF 6KD Msg 0 DTMF back select 45 02 nn nnnnn ...

Page 935: ...ers for Voice Mail integration Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Mail Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Retry Timer 0 64800 4 02 Polling Interval 0 64800 20 03 1LS Link Start Message Interval 0 64800 20 04 Wait for 1LS Time 0 64800 30 05 Wait for 2ET Time 0 64800 60 06 Restart LVP Check Interval 0 64800 30 07 Wait for 1LR Time 0 64800 20 ...

Page 936: ...45 03 NSL Timer Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 45 03 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 45 03 01 Retry Timer 4 back select 45 03 nn nnnnn ...

Page 937: ...ila EX MF Available Service Tone Number 01 64 Item No Item Input Data 1 Repeat count 0 255 0 is endless Unit Number 1 8 Item No Item Input Data 2 Basic Tone No 1 33 0 No Tone 33 Default Time Slot 3 Duration count 1 255 100 25500ms 4 Gain level dB 1 63 15 5 15 5 Basic Tone No Frequency Hz Level dB Basic Tone No Frequency Hz Level dB 1 400 13 17 520 650 13 19 2 520 13 18 650 780 13 19 3 580 13 19 78...

Page 938: ... 1 9 10 32 0dB 3 Special dial tone 0 1 9 10 32 0dB 4 Internal Recall dial tone 3 2 0 9 1 1 32 0dB 32 0dB 5 Trunk dial tone 0 1 9 10 32 0dB 6 Busy tone 0 2 0 10 5 5 20 6dB 20 6dB 7 DND busy tone 0 2 0 1 2 2 32 0dB 32 0dB 8 B busy tone 0 2 0 11 5 5 44 6dB 44 6dB 9 Internal Reorder Tone 0 2 11 0 3 2 20 6dB 20 6dB 10 Internal Interrupt Tone 0 2 0 9 2 3 32 0dB 32 0dB 11 Internal Confirmation tone 3 2 0...

Page 939: ...14 9dB 32 0dB 20 Door Box chime 2 3 6 7 7 5 5 5 0 2 2 3 4 6 5 38 3dB 26 3dB 38 3dB 26 3dB 14 9dB 32 0dB 21 Door Box chime 3 3 6 8 8 6 6 6 0 2 2 3 4 6 5 38 3dB 26 3dB 38 3dB 26 3dB 14 9dB 32 0dB 22 Door Box chime 4 3 6 4 4 2 2 2 0 1 1 2 2 3 2 38 3dB 26 3dB 38 3dB 26 3dB 14 9dB 32 0dB 23 Door Box chime 5 3 6 7 7 5 5 5 0 1 1 2 2 3 2 38 3dB 26 3dB 38 3dB 26 3dB 14 9dB 32 0dB 24 Door Box chime 6 3 6 8 ...

Page 940: ...dB 32 Splash tone 1 1 2 0 6 1 1 32 0dB 32 0dB 33 Splash tone 2 2 2 0 6 1 1 32 0dB 32 0dB 34 Splash tone 3 3 2 0 6 1 1 32 0dB 32 0dB 35 1 sec signal tone 1 1 6 10 32 0dB 36 Sensor alarm tone 1 0 2 7 0 2 2 32 0dB 32 0dB 37 Sensor alarm tone 2 0 2 7 0 5 5 32 0dB 32 0dB 38 Sensor alarm tone 3 0 2 7 0 7 7 32 0dB 32 0dB 39 Sensor alarm tone 4 0 2 7 0 10 10 32 0dB 32 0dB 40 Internal call waiting tone 1 1...

Page 941: ...Number unobtainable tone 0 1 11 0 32 0dB 48 VM message indication tone 0 2 0 8 1 1 32 0dB 32 0dB 49 Not Used 0 0 0 0 32 0dB 0 0 0 0 32 0dB 54 Not Used 0 0 0 0 32 0dB 55 Generate tone for TAPI2 1 0 1 3 0 32 0dB 56 Warning Beep Tone Signal ing 1 1 2 8 32 0dB 57 Headset Ear Piece Ringing Tone 0 5 0 2 0 2 0 2 1 1 1 20 32 0dB 32 0dB 32 0dB 32 0dB 32 0dB 58 Opening Chime Tone 1 8 2 2 14 14 15 15 16 16 2...

Page 942: ...the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program 59 Ending Chime Tone 1 8 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 2 2 2 2 2 2 6 4 32 0dB 26 3dB 32 0dB 26 3dB 32 0dB 26 3dB 32 0dB 26 3dB 60 Splash Tone 1 Mute 1 2 0 6 1 1 8 12dB 8 12dB 61 Splash Tone 2 Mute 2 2 0 6 1 1 8 12dB 8 12dB 62 Splash Tone 3 Mute 3 2 0 6 1 1 8 12dB 8 12dB 63...

Page 943: ... Basic Hardware Setup for System 80 01 Service Tone Setup Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 937 OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section ...

Page 944: ...option affects all trunk line calls system wide You make separate entries for duration and pause It is also possible to adjust the level of both high and low frequency tone Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Selectable Ring Tones Level Aspila EX MF Available Item No Item Input Data Default 1 Duration 1 255 5 100 ms 2 Pause 1 255 5 100 ms 3 Tone Level Low dB 1 97 45 0 3 69 11dB 4 To...

Page 945: ...am 80 02 DTMF Tone Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 80 02 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 80 02 01 Duration Time 5 back select 80 02 nn nnnnn ...

Page 946: ...eceive for Trunk 3 Reserve 4 Reserve 5 Reserve Item No Item Input Data 01 Detect Level 0 0dBm 30dBm 1 15dBm 45dBm 2 30dBm 55dBm 02 Start delay time 0 255 0 25ms 64ms 03 Min detect level 0 15 detect level 0 15dBm 0 to 30dBm 15 detect level 1 30dBm 0 to 45dBm 15 detect level 2 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 04 Max detect level 0 15 detect level 0 0dBm 0 to 15dBm 15 detect level 1 15dBm 0 to 30dBm 15 detect lev...

Page 947: ...rogram OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section Item No Item Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5 01 Detect Level 0 0 0 0 0 02 Start delay time 0 0 0 0 0 03 Min detect level 10 25dBm 15 30dBm 10 25dBm 10 25dBm 10 25dBm 04 Max detect level 2 2dBm 2 2dBm 2 2dBm 2 2dBm 2 2dBm 05 Forward twist level 5 6dBm 5 6dBm 5 6dBm 5 6dBm 5 6dBm...

Page 948: ...r Trunk 2 Busy Tone for Trunk 3 Ring Back Tone for Trunk 4 Reserve 5 Reserve Item No Item Input Data 01 Detect Level 1 0dBm 30dBm 2 15dBm 45dBm 3 30dBm 55dBm 02 Min detect level 0 15 detect level 0 15dBm 0 to 30dBm 15 detect level 1 30dBm 0 to 45dBm 15 detect level 2 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 03 S N ratio 0 4 0dB 20dB 04 No tone time 1 255 30 30 7650ms 0 No detection 05 Pulse Count 1 255 06 ON min time ...

Page 949: ... 01 Detect Level 0 0 30dBm 0 0 30dBm 0 0 30dBm 0 0 02 Min detect level 15 30dBm 15 30dBm 15 30dBm 0 0 03 S N ratio 4 20dB 4 20dB 4 20dB 0 0 04 No tone time 132 3990ms 132 3990ms 132 3990ms 0 0 05 Pulse Count 1 1 1 0 0 06 ON min time 63 1500ms 12 390ms 25 780ms 0 0 07 ON max time 0 Not detect 20 630ms 40 1230ms 0 0 08 OFF min time 1 60ms 12 390ms 52 1590ms 0 0 09 OFF max time 1 60ms 20 630ms 80 243...

Page 950: ...l Progress Tone Detector Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 80 04 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 80 04 01 Tone Rcv1 Detect level 0 0 30 back select 80 04 nn Tone Rcv1 nnnnn ...

Page 951: ...ding Time and Date Telephone Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 80 05 Date Format for SMDR and System Reports 1 Enter the programming mode 2 80 05 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s prog...

Page 952: ...e ringing detection maximum off time 0 255 0 8 2040mS 50 400ms 08 ringing signal not detection minimum 1 255 8 2040mS 88 704ms 09 Abandoned Call Detection Timer 1 255 64 16320mS 94 6016ms 10 continuous ringing minimum time 0 255 0 8 2040mS 38 304ms 11 continuous ringing maximum time 0 255 0 8 2040mS 88 704ms 12 ac impedance timer 1 255 64 16320mS 4 256ms 13 grounding time 1 255 4 1020mS 9 36ms 14 ...

Page 953: ...ed that series s programming section 22 loop disconnect detect minimum time 1 255 8 2040mS 50 400ms 23 loop disconnect detect maximum time 1 255 8 2040mS 80 640ms 24 on hook normal detect time 1 255 8 2040mS 3 24ms 25 on hook reverse detect time 1 255 8 2040mS 2 16ms 26 on hook disconnect detect time 1 255 16 4080mS 188 3008ms 27 pulse dial break time 10pps 1 255 4 1020mS 8 32ms 28 pulse dial make...

Page 954: ...0240mS 20 160ms 08 Incoming WINK DELAY Send Time 1 255 100 25500mS 3 300ms 09 Seizure WINK DELAY Receive Max Time 1 255 100 25500mS 48 4800ms 10 Receive WINK DELAY Duration Min Time 1 255 8 20240mS 13 104ms 11 Receive WINK DELAY Duration Max Time 1 255 8 20240mS 31 248ms 12 Receive DP Make Min Time 1 255 4 1020mS 5 20ms 13 Receive DP Make Max Time 1 255 4 1020mS 50 200ms 14 Receive DP Break Min Ti...

Page 955: ...uctions To enter data for Program 81 02 DIOPU Initial Data Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 81 02 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 81 02 01 Encoding Type 0 U Law back select 81...

Page 956: ...ELAY Duration Time 1 255 8 20240mS 20 200ms 09 Incoming WINK DELAY Send Time 1 255 100 25500mS 3 300ms 10 Seizure WINK DELAY Receive Max Time 1 255 100 25500mS 48 4800ms 11 Receive WINK DELAY Duration Min Time 1 255 8 20240mS 13 130ms 12 Receive WINK DELAY Duration Max Time 1 255 8 20240mS 31 310ms 13 Receive DP Make Min Time 1 255 4 1020mS 5 10ms 14 Receive DP Make Max Time 1 255 4 1020mS 50 100m...

Page 957: ...o enter data for Program 81 03 4TLIU Initial Data Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 81 03 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 81 03 01 Encoding Type 0 U Law back select 81 03 nn nn...

Page 958: ... To enter data for Program 81 04 ISDN BRI Layer 1 T Point Initial Data Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 81 04 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section Level Aspila EX MF Available Item...

Page 959: ...2 T Point Initial Data Setup to define the vari ous basic options for layer 2 of ISDN BRI PRI Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ISDN Compatibility Level Aspila EX MF Available Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Timer T200 1 255 100 25500ms 10 1sec 02 Timer T201 1 255 100 25500ms 10 1sec 03 Timer T202 1 255 100 25500ms 20 2sec 04 Timer T203 1 255 100 25500ms 200 20sec 05 N200 1 255...

Page 960: ...ram 81 05 ISDN BRI PRI Layer 2 T Point Initial Data Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 81 05 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 81 05 01 Timer T200 10 back select 81 05 nn nnnnn ...

Page 961: ...ayer 3 Timer Type Number 1 5 Item No Item Input Data Default 1 T301 0 180 254 sec 180 sec 2 T302 1 254 sec 15 sec 3 T303 1 254 sec 4 sec 4 T304 0 254 sec 30 sec 5 T305 1 254 sec 30 sec 6 T306 0 254 sec 30 sec 7 T307 1 254 sec 180 sec 8 T308 1 254 sec 4 sec 9 T309 1 254 sec 90 sec 10 T310 0 180 sec 180 sec 11 T312 1 254 sec 6 sec 12 T313 1 254 sec 4 sec 13 T314 1 254 sec 4 sec 14 T316 T317 1 254 se...

Page 962: ...Point Timer Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 81 06 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Layer 3 Timer number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s progra...

Page 963: ...cription Use Program 81 07 CODEC Filter Setup for Analogue Trunk Ports to define the CODEC QSLAC Filter for each analogue trunk port Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing Level Aspila EX IN Available Trunk Port Number 001 200 CODEC Filter Type Default 0 No Filter 1 0dB Loss 2 4dB Loss 3 8dB Loss 4 Specified Data 2 ...

Page 964: ...he programming mode 2 81 07 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 81 07 01 Trunk1 CODEC...

Page 965: ...00msec 9 E M Clear Signal Detection Time 1 255 100msec 25500msec 6 600msec 10 OPX Clear Signal Detection Time 1 255 100msec 25500msec 6 600msec 11 Loop Ringing Signal Detection Time 1 250 8msec 2040msec 10 80msec 12 Ground Ringing Signal Detection Time 1 250 8msec 2040msec 10 80msec 13 DID Ringing Signal Detection Time 1 250 8msec 2040msec 10 80msec 14 E M Ringing Signal Detection Time 1 250 8msec...

Page 966: ...c 2040msec 25 200msec 39 E M Delay Send Duration Time 1 250 8msec 2040msec 25 200msec 40 DID Incoming Wink Send Duration Time 1 255 100msec 25500msec 3 300msec 41 DID Time Out Seizure Wink Delay Reeceive Maxi mum Time 1 255 100msec 25500msec 48 4800msec 42 DID Wink Signal Receive Wink Duration Mini mum Time 1 250 8msec 2040msec 12 96msec 43 DID Wink Signal Receive Wink Duration Maxi mum Time 1 250...

Page 967: ...OPX Single Ringing Send Time 1 1 255 100msec 25500msec 10 1000msec 66 OPX Single Between Ringing Send Time 1 1 255 100msec 25500msec 9 900msec 67 Loop Guard Time 1 1 255 100msec 25500msec 9 900msec 68 Ground Guard Time 1 1 255 100msec 25500msec 9 900msec 69 DID Guard Time 1 1 255 100msec 25500msec 9 900msec 70 E M Guard Time 1 1 255 100msec 25500msec 9 900msec 71 OPX Guard Time 1 1 255 100msec 255...

Page 968: ...o enter data for Program 81 08 T1 Trunk Timer Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 81 08 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 81 08 01 Ans Sig Detect LOOP 15 back select 81 08 nn nnnnn...

Page 969: ...e for their incoming calls Each Type in turn consists of two frequencies and the modulation played simultaneously to make up the tone These frequencies are determined by their Frequency Number selected in Items 1 and 2 see below In this program you assign the two Frequency Numbers and Modulation for each Type for each of the four Ranges The chart below shows the default Fre quency Numbers for each...

Page 970: ... 760 660 16Hz Modulation 16Hz Modulation 16Hz Modulation Pattern 2 Trunk Incoming High Mid Low 1100 660 520 1400 760 660 8Hz Modulation 8Hz Modulation 8Hz Modulation Pattern 3 Trunk Incoming High Mid Low 1100 660 520 1100 660 520 envelope envelope envelope Pattern 4 Trunk Incoming High Mid Low 1100 660 520 1100 660 520 No modulation No modulation No modulation Intercom Incoming Pat tern High Mid L...

Page 971: ... Incoming Ring Tone 1 Enter the programming mode 2 82 01 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 82 01 01 INC Freq 1 INC Rng1 Freq1 5 1100Hz back select 82 01 nn nnnnn ...

Page 972: ...FF LED Pattern 1 FL On 500ms Off 500ms LED Pattern 2 WK On 250ms Off 250ms LED Pattern 3 RW On 125ms Off 125ms Level Aspila EX MF Available Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Incoming Call from Trunk Extension Voice Call Camp On Callback Follow Me Source side Monitor Destination side Call Forward Destination side Message Waiting Destination side 0 7 3 02 Hold by other extension Normal Hold Follow ...

Page 973: ...one Feature Cross Reference None Telephone Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 82 02 Key Telephone LED Pattern Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 82 02 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series ...

Page 974: ... Input Data LED Pattern 0 OFF LED Pattern 1 FL On 500ms Off 500ms LED Pattern 2 WK On 250ms Off 250ms LED Pattern 3 RW On 125ms Off 125ms LED Pattern 4 IR On 125ms Off 125ms On 125ms Off 625ms LED Pattern 5 IL On 875ms Off 125ms LED Pattern 6 IW On 625ms Off 125ms On 125ms Off 125ms LED Pattern 7 ON Level Aspila EX MF Available Item No Item Input Data Default 01 ACD Log In 0 7 1 02 ACD Log Out 0 7...

Page 975: ...tructions To enter data for Program 82 03 DSS Console LED Pattern Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 82 03 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 82 03 01 ACD Log In 1 Pattern1 back se...

Page 976: ... 16Hz 03 Minimum break time 1 255 5ms 1275ms 2 10ms 04 Maximum break time 1 255 5ms 1275ms 20 100ms 05 Minimum make time 1 255 5ms 1275ms 2 10ms 06 Maximum make time 1 255 5ms 1275ms 20 100ms 07 Minimum hook flash time 1 255 5ms 1275ms 21 105ms 08 Maximum hook flash time 1 255 5ms 1275ms 200 1000ms 09 Minimum ground flash time 1 255 5ms 1275ms 21 105ms 10 Minimum off hook time 1 255 5ms 1275ms 21 ...

Page 977: ...m 82 04 SLIU Initial Data Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 82 04 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 82 04 01 Encoding Type 0 U Law back select 82 04 nn nnnnn ...

Page 978: ...int Initial Data Setup to define the vari ous basic options for the layer 2 of ISDN BRI PRI S Point Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ISDN Compatibility Level Aspila EX MF Available Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Timer T200 1 255 100 25500ms 10 1 sec 02 Timer T201 1 255 100 25500ms 10 1 sec 03 Timer T202 1 255 100 25500ms 20 2 sec 04 Timer T203 1 255 100 25500ms 100 10 sec 05 ...

Page 979: ...ogram 82 05 ISDN BRI PRI Layer 2 S Point Initial Data Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 82 05 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 82 05 01 Timer T200 10 back select 82 05 nn nnnnn ...

Page 980: ...IN Available Layer 3 Timer Type Number 1 5 Item No Item Input Data Default 1 T301 0 180 254 sec 180 sec 2 T302 1 254 sec 10 sec 3 T303 1 254 sec 4 sec 4 T304 0 254 sec 20 sec 5 T305 1 254 sec 30 sec 6 T306 0 254 sec 30 sec 7 T307 1 254 sec 180 sec 8 T308 1 254 sec 4 sec 9 T309 1 254 sec 90 sec 10 T310 0 180 sec 30 sec 11 T312 1 254 sec 6 sec 12 T313 1 254 sec 4 sec 13 T314 1 254 sec 4 sec 14 T316 ...

Page 981: ... Timer Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 82 06 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Layer 3 Timer number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming...

Page 982: ... Analogue Station Ports Description Use Program 82 07 CODEC Filter Setup for Analogue Station Ports to define the CODEC QSLAC Filter for each analogue extension port Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Level Aspila EX IN Available Extension Port Number 001 256 CODEC Filter Type Default 0 No filter 1 0dB Loss 2 4dB Loss 3 8dB Loss 4 Specified Data 1 ...

Page 983: ...rogramming mode 2 82 07 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the extension port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 82 07 01 Extn Po...

Page 984: ... for Traveler 83 01 CS Data Setup 978 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual Program 83 Basic Hardware Setup for Traveler 83 01 CS Data Setup Description This is a future item and is not currently used Level Aspila EX IN Not Available ...

Page 985: ... Hardware Setup for Traveler 83 02 Air Clock Data Setup Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 979 83 02 Air Clock Data Setup Description This is a future item and is not currently used Level Aspila EX MF Not Available ...

Page 986: ...ic Hardware Setup for Traveler 83 03 Frame Offset Value 980 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual 83 03 Frame Offset Value Description This is a future item and is not currently used Level Aspila EX MF Not Available ...

Page 987: ...p for Traveler 83 04 Frequency Number Between PS and PS Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 981 83 04 Frequency Number Between PS and PS Description This is a future item and is not currently used Level Aspila EX MF Not Available ...

Page 988: ...c Hardware Setup for Traveler 83 05 CS Area Information 982 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual 83 05 CS Area Information Description This is a future item and is not currently used Level Aspila EX MF Not Available ...

Page 989: ...are Setup for Traveler 83 06 CS Area Number Information Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 983 83 06 CS Area Number Information Description This is a future item and is not currently used Level Aspila EX MF Not Available ...

Page 990: ...dware Setup for Traveler 83 07 CS DL2 Information Setup 984 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual 83 07 CS DL2 Information Setup Description This is a future item and is not currently used Level Aspila EX MF Not Available ...

Page 991: ...Hardware Setup for Traveler 83 08 CS Additional ID Mode Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 985 83 08 CS Additional ID Mode Description This is a future item and is not currently used Level Aspila EX MF Not Available ...

Page 992: ...ardware Setup for Traveler 83 09 CS Additional ID Setup 986 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual 83 09 CS Additional ID Setup Description This is a future item and is not currently used Level Aspila EX MF Not Available ...

Page 993: ...ware Setup for Traveler 83 10 Virtual Master CSID Setup Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 987 83 10 Virtual Master CSID Setup Description This is a future item and is not currently used Level Aspila EX IN Not Available ...

Page 994: ...les on G711 or not 04 G711 type 0 A law 1 þu law 1 Set the type of G711 A law orþu law 05 G729 Audio Frame 1 10 ms 2 20 ms 3 30 ms 4 40 ms 5 50 ms 6 60 ms 7 70 ms 8 80 ms 3 Maximum number of G729 Audio Frame 06 G 729 VAD Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 07 G 729 Jitter Buffer Minimum 0 500 ms 30 Set the minimum value of G 729 Jitter Buffer 08 G 729 Jitter Buffer Type 0 500 ms 60 Set the average value of ...

Page 995: ...er Buffer 20 G 723 Jitter Buffer typ 0 500 ms 60 Set the average value of G 723 Jitter Buffer 21 G 723 Jitter Buffer max 0 500 ms 120 Set the maximum value of G 723 Jitter Buffer 22 VAD threshold 0 30 20db 10db 0 20db 50dbm 1 19db 49dbm 20 0db 30dbm 29 9dbm 21dbm 30 10dbm 20dbm 20 Threshold of silence detection Change value based 30 Become invalid item if item 03 is set to Disable 23 Idle Noise Le...

Page 996: ...4 dbm 1 13 dbm 14 0 dbm 27 13 dbm 28 14 dbm 14 31 RX Gain 0 28 14 14 0 14 dbm 1 13 dbm 14 0 dbm 27 13 dbm 28 14 dbm 14 32 Not Used 33 Audio Capability Priority 0 G711 PT 1 G723 PT 2 G729 PT 0 The option selected here determines what other options are applied from this program 34 Band Control Mode 0 Off 1 On 0 35 Max Bandwidth 0 65535kbps 0 36 Fax Max Rate 0 V 27ter 2400 bps 1 V 27ter 4800 bps 2 V ...

Page 997: ...1 TCF is Locally Gen erated and Checked 2 TCF is Sent Over the Network 1 For H 323 negotiation 47 Maximum Low Speed Data Packetization 1 65535 1 48 Transmit Network Timeout 10 32000 sec 150 sec 49 Eflag Start Timer 0 65535 2600 ms 50 Eflag Stop Timer 0 65535 2300 ms 51 Fax Relay Scan Line Fix Up Feature 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 52 Fax Relay Eflags for First DIS 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 53 Fax Relay FOP Pr...

Page 998: ...Basic Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 84 01 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 59 Fax Relay Function 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 84 01 01 RAS Ucast Port20001 back select 84 01 nn nnnnn...

Page 999: ...er 0 255 sec 10 sec 06 Not Used 07 H 245 Master Slave Determination Timer 0 255 sec 5 sec 08 H 245 Master Slave Determination Retry Count 0 255 sec 3 sec 09 H 245 Capability Exchange Timer 0 255 sec 5 sec 10 H 245 Logical Channel Establishment Timer 0 255 sec 50 sec Unidirectional or bi directional logi cal channel establishment timer 11 H 245 Mode Request Procedures Timer 0 255 sec 50 sec 12 H 24...

Page 1000: ...IRR Timer 0 255 sec 5 sec 26 IRR Retry Count 0 255 2 27 RAS DRQ Timer 0 255 sec 8 sec 28 DRQ Retry Count 0 255 2 29 RAS LRQ Timer 0 255 sec 5 sec 30 LRQ Retry Count 0 255 2 31 RAS RAI Timer 0 255 sec 3 sec 32 RAI Retry Count 0 255 2 33 Call Signaling Port Number 0 65535 1730 It is control port for IP Telephone 34 Not Used 35 Fast Start 0 Disable 1 36 RAS 0 65535 20001 37 Terminal Type 0 255 60 H 2...

Page 1001: ...2 H 225 H 245 Information Basic Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 84 02 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 84 02 01 H225 Alert Time 180sec back select 84 02 nn nnnnn ...

Page 1002: ...spila EX IN Available Terminal Type 1 Dterm IP 2 Smart Phone 3 Bandle IP Phone Item No Item Input Data Default Description 01 NGT Signal receive port Num ber 0 65535 3001 02 DRS port Number 0 65535 3000 03 Not Used 04 Not Used 05 Not Used 06 Area 0 Japan 1 USA 2 Australia 3 EU 4 Asia 5 Other Country 0 07 Type of Service Mode 1 Invalid 2 IP Precedence 3 Diffserve 1 08 Type of service 0x00 0xff C0 T...

Page 1003: ...mation Basic Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 84 03 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 10 Local 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 84 03 01 NGT_Recv_Port back select 84 03 nn nnnnn Item No It...

Page 1004: ...ructions To enter data for Program 84 04 VoIPU PCB DHCP Server Mode Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 84 04 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section Level Aspila EX IN Available Item In...

Page 1005: ... Level Aspila EX IN Available SLOT Number 01 16 Item Input Data Default Description Related Program IP Address 1 0 0 1 126 255 255 254 128 1 0 1 191 254255 254 192 0 1 1 223 255 254 254 173 16 0 20 Set IP Address of VoIPU PCB IP Address will be increased in accordance with number of slot 84 04 This become invalid data if Program 84 04 is set to 0 Disable LAN 0 Auto Detect 1 100 Mbps Full Duplex 2 ...

Page 1006: ... 2 84 05 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the slot number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 84 05 01 Slot1 IP Add 172 16 0 20 back se...

Page 1007: ...ceeds the defined value 05 pktsLost threshold 0 4294967295 0 The data will be sent to the NTCPU if the value exceeds the defined value 06 Ext HighSeq threshold 0 4294967295 0 The data will be sent to the NTCPU if the value exceeds the defined value 07 jitter threshold 0 4294967295 sec 0 The data will be sent to the NTCPU if the value exceeds the defined value 08 lastSR threshold 0 4294967295 0 The...

Page 1008: ...mode 2 84 06 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the slot number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 84 06 01 Slot1 RTP Port No 10020 back...

Page 1009: ...etup the download data for the IP phone Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference VoIP Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Input Data Default Description 01 Server Mode 0 TFTP 1 FTP 0 02 File Server 1 0 0 1 126 255 255 254 128 1 0 1 191 254 255 254 192 0 1 1 223 255 254 254 0 0 0 0 03 Log in Name 20 Characters Max No Setting 04 Password 20 Characters Max No Setting ...

Page 1010: ... 07 F W Download Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 84 07 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 84 07 01 Server Mode 0 TFTP back select 84 07 nn nnnnn ...

Page 1011: ...name of the IP phone for download Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference VoIP Level Aspila EX IN Available Terminal Type 1 ITR 16DK 1D 2 IP RD 3 IP R 4 ITR 32D 1D 5 IP1WW_IP_Adapter 6 ITR LC 1 7 IP1NA 24TIXH 8 IP1WW 24TIXH Item No Item Input Data Default Description 01 Firmware Directory 64 Characters Maximum No Setting 02 Firmware File Name 30 Characters Maximum No Setting ...

Page 1012: ...4 08 F W Download Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 84 08 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 84 08 01 FirmWare Dir back select 84 08 nn nnnnn ...

Page 1013: ...ram 84 09 VLAN Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 84 09 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Input Data Default 01 VLAN 0 Disable 1 Enable 0...

Page 1014: ...e 1 Default 2 DRS 3 Protims 4 Voice Control 5 H 323 6 TRP_RTCP 7 SIP 2003_2 Item No Item Input Data Default Description 01 ToS Mode 0 Disable 1 IP Precedence 2 Diffserv 0 02 Priority IP Precedence 0 7 0 01 ToS 1 IP Precedence 03 Low Delay 0 1 0 01 ToS 1 IP Precedence 04 Wide Band 0 1 0 01 ToS 1 IP Precedence 05 High Reliability 0 1 0 01 ToS 1 IP Precedence 06 Low Cost 0 1 0 01 ToS 1 IP Precedence ...

Page 1015: ... 2 84 10 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Protocol type to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 84 10 01 Protocol Type1 ToS Mode 0 Inva...

Page 1016: ...ption 01 G711 Audio Frame 3 3 02 G711 VAD Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 03 G711 Type 0 A law 1 u law 1 04 G 711 Jitter Buffer Min 0 145 ms 30 05 G 711 Jitter Buffer Type 0 145 ms 60 06 G 711 Jitter Buffer Max 0 145 ms 120 07 G 729 Audio Frame 3 8 3 08 G 729 VAD Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 09 G 729 Jitter Buffer Min 0 500 ms 30 10 G 729 Jitter Buffer Type 0 500 ms 60 11 G 729 Jitter Buffer Max 0 500 ms 1...

Page 1017: ... 5000 7000 5000 thru 7000dbm 5000 5000dbm 7000 7000dbm 7000 20 Echo Canceler Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 21 Echo Canceler Tail Size 1 8 ms 2 16 ms 3 32mS 2 84 11 21 Disable 22 Echo Canceler NLP Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 Non linear processing mode 23 Echo Canceler NLP Noise 40 70 40 70 40 40 dbm 70 70 dbm 70 84 11 22 Disable 24 Echo Canceler CNG CFG 0 adaptive 1 fixed 0 84 11 22 Disable 25 Echo Cance...

Page 1018: ...nt to program 4 Select the type number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 27 RX Gain 0 28 14 14 0 14 dbm 1 13 dbm 14 0 dbm 27 13 dbm 28 14 dbm 14 28 Audio Capabi...

Page 1019: ...e 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 03 G711 Type 0 A law 1 m law 1 04 G 711 Jitter Buffer Min 0 145 ms 30 05 G 711 Jitter Buffer Type 0 145 ms 60 06 G 711 Jitter Buffer Max 0 145 ms 120 07 G 729 Audio Frame 23 8 3 08 G 729 VAD Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 09 G 729 Jitter Buffer Min 0 500 ms 30 10 G 729 Jitter Buffer Type 0 500 ms 60 11 G 729 Jitter Buffer Max 0 500 ms 120 12 G 723 Audio Frame 1 2 1 13 G 723 VAD M...

Page 1020: ...dbm 7000 7000dbm 7000 20 Echo Canceler Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 21 Echo Canceler Tail Size 1 8 ms 2 16 ms 3 32mS 2 84 12 20 Disable 22 Echo Canceler NLP Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 Non linear processing mode 23 Echo Canceler NLP Noise 40 70 40 70 40 40 dbm 70 70 dbm 70 84 12 22 Disable 24 Echo Canceler CNG CFG 0 adaptive 1 fixed 0 84 12 22 Disable 25 Echo Canceler 4w Det 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 26 TX ...

Page 1021: ...ing mode 2 84 12 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 27 RX Gain 0 28 14 14 0 14 dbm 1 13 dbm 14 0 dbm 27 13 dbm 28 14 dbm 14 28 Audio Capability Priority 0 G711_PT 1 G723_PT 2 G729_PT...

Page 1022: ...s None Feature Cross Reference Networking Level Aspila EX IN Available Hub Slot 1 16 Hub Port 0 8 Item No Item Input Data Default Description 01 Link Speed Duplex 0 Enable 1 Disable 0 02 Link Speed 0 10Mbps 1 100Mbps 1 85 01 01 Disable 03 Half Duplex Hull Duplex 0 Half 1 Full 1 85 01 01 Disable 04 0 MDIX 1 MDI 2 Auto 2 05 Back Pressure 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 Half Duplex Back Pressure 06 802 3x 0 Ena...

Page 1023: ... number of the item you want to program 4 Select the slot number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 85 01 01 Slot No 1 Port1 AutoNego 0 Enable back select 85 01 ...

Page 1024: ...nput Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Networking Level Aspila EX IN Available Hub Slot 1 16 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 VLAN Mode 0 Enable 1 Disable 0 02 Port 1 VLAN ID 1 4095 1 03 Port 2 VLAN ID 1 4095 1 04 Port 3 VLAN ID 1 4095 1 05 Port 4 VLAN ID 1 4095 1 06 Port 5 VLAN ID 1 4095 1 07 Port 6 VLAN ID 1 4095 1 08 Port 7 VLAN ID 1 4095 1 09 Port 8 VLAN ID 1 4095 1 ...

Page 1025: ...er of the item you want to program 4 Select the slot number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 85 02 01 Slot No 1 Tag VLAN Mode 0 Dis able back select 85 02 nn S...

Page 1026: ...Program 85 03 Piority Setup to set the priority of packet management for each SHUBU PCB Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Networking Level Aspila EX IN Available Hub Slot 1 16 Hub Port 0 8 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Priority 0 Disable 2 Low 3 High 0 02 RX High 0 7 1 03 TX High 0 7 7 04 TX Low 0 7 0 ...

Page 1027: ...number of the item you want to program 4 Select the slot number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 85 03 01 Slot No 1 Port1 Default 0 Disable back select 85 03 n...

Page 1028: ...scription Use Program 85 04 Port Mirroring Setup to define the port mirroring setup for each SHUBU PCB Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Networking Level Aspila EX IN Available Hub Slot 1 16 Item No Item Input Data Default Description 01 Port 0 Enable 1 Disable 0 02 Source Port 0 7 0 03 Target Port 0 7 0 ...

Page 1029: ...r the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the slot number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 85 04 01 Slot No 1 Port Mirroring 0 Disable back select ...

Page 1030: ...To enter data for Program 90 01 Installation Date 1 Enter the programming mode 2 90 01 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Input Data Default...

Page 1031: ...e IN level programs The reverse type white on black just beneath the Description heading is the program s access level You can only use the pro gram if your access level meets or exceeds the level the program requires SA level password can access to SA or SB programs and SB level password can access to SB programs only Caution It is NOT recommended to change this data unnecessarily If the digits a...

Page 1032: ...e User No User Name Password Level Level Description 1 NEC I 1 MF Blocked User Manufac turer programming access only 2 Aspila EX 12345678 2 IN Installer Level Access to all programs this manual 3 CUSTOMER1 0000 3 SA System Administrator Level 1 Restricted access 4 CUSTOMER2 9999 4 SB System Administrator Level 2 More restricted access 5 Not Used Not Used 6 Not Used Not Used 7 Not Used Not Used 8 N...

Page 1033: ...mming mode 2 90 02 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the User number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 90 02 01 User1 User name NEC I ...

Page 1034: ... TRFR Press only TRFR key for cancel Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Telephone Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90 03 Save Data 1 Enter the programming mode 2 90 03 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until...

Page 1035: ...for cancel Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Telephone Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90 04 Load Data 1 Enter the programming mode 2 90 04 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series...

Page 1036: ...ts If a different type of interface card is being installed into a slot previously used example changing from a ATRU to DSTU PCB the slot should be deleted option 1 first before installing the new interface card Reset allows you to send a reset code Input Data Conditions When you delete or reset a PCB you must first remove it from its slot then run Program 90 05 When reusing the slot for another P...

Page 1037: ...3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Menu number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 90 05 01 Menu 1 Slot Number back select 90 05 nn M...

Page 1038: ... maintenance Busy Out lets you block a PCB from placing outgoing calls just like placing the PCB switch down Once busied out none of the ports on the PCB can be used for new calls Existing calls however are not torn down Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Level Aspila EX SA Available Menu Number 0 Set Busy Out 1 Reset Release Busy Out Trunk Port Number 1 200 ...

Page 1039: ...06 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Menu number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 90 06 01 Menu 1 TRK Port back select 90 06 nn M...

Page 1040: ...Enter the programming mode 2 90 07 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Menu number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section Level Aspila EX...

Page 1041: ...ure Cross Reference None Telephone Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90 08 System Reset 1 Enter the programming mode 2 90 08 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section Level...

Page 1042: ...Input Data Note 1 If the Month is set to 00 and Day has been set the system will automatically be reset every month of defined day Note 2 If the Day is set to 00 and the Time Hour and Minute has been set the system will automatically be reset every day of defined time Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Month 00 12 Note 1 00 ...

Page 1043: ... 09 Automatic System Reset Time 1 Enter the programming mode 2 90 09 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 90 09 01 SysReset Month0 back select 90 09 nn nnnnn ...

Page 1044: ...uto dial Alarm Type Report Note Is Used To Advise of Action 1 2 MIN 0 Board Initialization Error Initialization failure or the PCB is defective Remove and reinstall the PCB If RECover message is received in the alarm report the PCB is good If not replace with a new PCB 2 2 MIN 0 Board Initial Test Error PCB initial test failure or the PCB is defective Remove and reinstall the PCB If RECover messag...

Page 1045: ...the CPRU PCB is unplugged or defective Check the battery connector If it is connected correctly then replace the battery 9 0 0 Blocking No default setting Failure may have occurred because Terminal blocking detected Terminal is unplugged Wire is disconnected DSTU card is defective Check the terminal wiring and reconnect properly Then unplug and plug in the PCB If RECover message is received in the...

Page 1046: ...tem you want to program 4 Select the Alarm number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 50 0 0 51 0 0 52 0 0 VM HD 53 0 0 100 0 0 90 10 01 Alarm No1 Alarm Type 2 MI...

Page 1047: ...an be up to 24 digits long using the charac ters 0 9 and Telephone Number Up to 24 digits No setting 04 Used a Trunk Group for Report Define the trunk group used when placing calls to the Service Center for Automatic Fault Reporting 0 100 0 05 Reported Customer ID Define the site identification data sent to the Service Center when automatically report ing a fault The data can consist of alphanu me...

Page 1048: ... for Program 90 11 System Alarm Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 90 11 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 90 11 01 Alarm Disp TEL back select 90 11 nn nnnnn ...

Page 1049: ...e Cross Reference None Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Output Port Type Indicate the type of connection used for the System Alarms The baud rate for the COM port should be set in Program 10 21 02 0 No setting 1 COM port NTCPU 2 USB port NTCPU 3 Reserve 4 CTA CTU 0 02 Destination Extension Number If the output port type item 1 is set to CTA enter the extension number...

Page 1050: ...2 System Alarm Output 1 Enter the programming mode 2 90 12 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 90 12 01 Output Type 0 None back select 90 12 nn nnnnn ...

Page 1051: ... None Feature Cross Reference None Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Output Port Type Indicate the type of connection used for the SMDR 0 No setting 1 COM port NTCPU 2 USB port NTCPU 3 Reserve 4 CTA CTU 0 02 Destination Extension Number If the output port type item 1 is set to CTA enter the extension number with the CTA connection Extension Number Up to 8 digits No se...

Page 1052: ...3 System Information Output 1 Enter the programming mode 2 90 13 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 90 13 01 Output Type 0 None back select 90 13 nn nnnnn ...

Page 1053: ...eference None Telephone Programming Instructions To enter data for Program 90 16 Main Software Information 1 Enter the programming mode 2 90 16 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section Lev...

Page 1054: ... Code 2 Byte 02 DSP Firmware Version Number 00 00 00 00_15 15 15 15 BCD Code 2 Byte 03 ESI Firmware Version Number 00 00_15 15 BCD Code 1 Byte 04 SLI Firmware Version Number 00 00_15 15 BCD Code 1 Byte 05 COI Firmware Version Number 00 00_15 15 BCD Code 1 Byte 06 BRI Firmware Version Number 00 00_15 15 BCD Code 1 Byte 07 PRI Firmware Version Number 00 00_15 15 BCD Code 1 Byte 08 CSIU Firmware Vers...

Page 1055: ... Firmware Information 1 Enter the programming mode 2 90 17 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 90 17 01 DSPDB Ver 02 08 01 04 back select 90 17 nn nnnnn ...

Page 1056: ...zation for Japanese Character Telephone 1050 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual 90 18 Password Initialization for Japanese Character Telephone Description This program is not used Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Level Aspila EX SA Available ...

Page 1057: ...Dial Block Release 1 Enter the programming mode 2 90 19 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programmi...

Page 1058: ...rting TMS Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Call Traffic Output 0 Not measured 1 Measure 0 02 All Line Busy Output 0 No sum 1 Sum up 0 03 All Line Busy Output 0 Not detected 1 256 Report when the data is reached to the defined value 0 04 DTMF Receiver Busy Output 0 05 Dial Tone Detector Busy Output 0 06 Caller ID Receiver Busy Output 0 07 Voice Mail Channel All Busy O...

Page 1059: ...20 Traffic Report Data Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 90 20 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 90 20 01 Call Traffic 0 No back select 90 20 nn nnnnn ...

Page 1060: ...amming Instructions To enter data for Program 90 21 Traffic Report Output 1 Enter the programming mode 2 90 21 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section Level Aspila EX IN Available Item No...

Page 1061: ...Version information to define the hardware and firmware version of the NGT terminal Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Level Aspila EX IN Available Terminal Type 1 Dterm IP 2 Smart Phone 3 Bandle IP Phone 4 ITR 32D 1D 5 IP1WW_IP_Adapter 6 ITR LC 1 7 IP1NA 24TIXH 8 IP1WW 24TIXH Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Hardware Version 00 FF 00 02 Firmware Version 00 00 FF FF 00 00 ...

Page 1062: ... 90 22 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Telephone Type Kind number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 90 22 01 Tel kind 1 Hardware...

Page 1063: ...ng Registration of IP Telephones 1 Enter the programming mode 2 90 23 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that seri...

Page 1064: ...cation Time Setup Description Use Program 90 24 System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup to set up when the alarm report will print Input Data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Level Aspila EX IN Available Notification Number 1 12 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Month 00 12 0 disabled 00 02 Day 00 31 00 03 Hour 00 23 00 04 Minute 00 59 00 ...

Page 1065: ...e programming mode 2 90 24 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Telephone Type Kind number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 90 24 01...

Page 1066: ...System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup 1 Enter the programming mode 2 90 25 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Select the Telephone Type Kind number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys 5 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 6 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exite...

Page 1067: ...om which the data will be copied In case of Trunk Base Trunk Port Number 1 200 In case of Trunk Group Base Trunk Group Number 1 100 In case of Extension Base Extension Number up to 8 digits In case of Department Group Base Department Group Number 1 64 In case of DSS DSS Console Number 1 32 Destination Number From Enter the first extension trunk group etc number to which the information is to be co...

Page 1068: ... Trunk 22 02 Incoming Service Type Setup 22 03 Trunk Ring Tone Setup 22 05 IRG Assignment for Normal Ring Trunk 22 08 Second IRG Setup for unanswered DIL IRG 31 05 Incoming Ring Tone Audible on External Speaker Program No Program Name Note 35 03 SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group Program No Program Name Note 15 01 Extension Basic Data Setup include Virtual Extension Copy all data except extensio...

Page 1069: ...tension to which the pro gramming is being copied Feature Cross Reference None 15 10 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup 15 11 Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment 15 12 Conversation Recording Destination for Exten sion 20 06 Class of Service for Extension 21 02 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions 21 04 Toll Restriction Class for Extensions 21 11 Hotline Assignment 23 03 Ringing L...

Page 1070: ... Copy Program 1 Enter the programming mode 2 92 01 3 Enter the number of the item you want to program 4 Enter data for the item you selected HOLD 5 Enter data for the next item in the program OR Press MSG once to enter a new item number OR Press MSG until you ve exited that series s programming section 92 01 01 Copy Function back select 92 01 nn nnnnn ...

Page 1071: ...Program 92 Copy Program 92 01 Copy Program Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1065 For Your Notes ...

Page 1072: ...Program 92 Copy Program 92 01 Copy Program 1066 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual ...

Page 1073: ...Aspila EX Software Manual DXE to Aspila EX DXE to Aspila EX Conversion ...

Page 1074: ...DXE to Aspila EX Conversion Aspila EX Software Manual DXE to Aspila EX DXE to Aspila EX Conversion ...

Page 1075: ... 82 01 03 0113 04 20 15 09 0113 05 20 15 10 0114 81 01 0114 17 81 01 09 0114 12 81 01 16 0115 82 04 0116 01 08 80 04 0116 11 80 04 0119 0120 32 03 03 31 06 04 31 06 05 32 03 02 0120 32 03 03 0122 81 04 0124 81 05 0126 81 06 82 06 0130 35 01 03 80 05 0132 81 02 0133 81 03 0136 10 03 01 10 03 02 10 03 03 0140 20 25 0150 90 15 0201 90 02 0202 90 02 0203 21 14 01 21 14 02 0302 01 10 04 02 0303 10 09 0...

Page 1076: ...12 21 01 04 0405 13 21 01 06 0405 14 32 01 01 0405 15 20 02 06 0405 16 21 01 09 0405 17 20 01 05 0405 18 31 01 02 0405 19 20 18 03 0405 20 20 18 04 DXE Aspila EX 0405 21 20 18 05 0405 22 24 01 01 0405 23 20 01 06 0405 24 20 21 01 0405 25 20 21 02 0405 26 20 01 08 0405 27 24 01 02 0405 28 20 18 01 0405 29 20 01 09 0405 30 21 01 03 0405 31 22 01 06 0405 32 20 01 10 0405 33 20 02 08 0405 34 25 07 01 ...

Page 1077: ...3 0406 84 20 13 20 0406 85 20 13 21 0406 87 20 09 04 0406 88 20 13 22 0406 89 20 13 23 0406 91 20 11 13 0406 92 20 10 05 DXE Aspila EX 0406 93 15 03 07 0406 94 15 03 08 0406 96 20 07 13 0406 97 20 07 14 0406 98 20 07 15 0406 99 20 11 15 0406 102 20 07 18 0406 103 20 07 19 0406 104 20 07 20 0406 105 20 13 26 0406 107 20 13 02 0406 108 20 13 03 0406 109 42 03 04 0406 110 42 03 05 0406 111 42 03 08 0...

Page 1078: ...508 11 08 0510 11 09 01 0511 01 11 10 02 0511 02 11 12 01 0511 03 11 11 05 11 11 06 DXE Aspila EX 0511 05 11 10 01 0511 06 11 11 14 0511 07 11 11 08 0511 08 11 12 26 0511 09 11 11 07 0511 10 11 11 09 0511 11 11 11 10 0511 12 11 11 11 0511 13 11 12 12 0511 14 11 12 02 0511 15 11 12 03 0511 16 11 12 27 0511 17 11 12 28 0511 18 11 12 36 0511 19 11 12 20 0511 20 11 12 04 0511 21 11 12 05 0511 22 11 11...

Page 1079: ...514 26 11 14 10 0514 27 11 14 11 0514 28 11 14 12 0514 29 11 14 13 0514 30 11 14 14 0514 31 11 14 15 0514 32 11 14 16 0514 34 11 11 33 0514 35 11 10 27 DXE Aspila EX 0514 40 11 11 35 0514 41 11 12 24 0514 42 11 11 40 0514 44 11 12 53 0514 45 11 13 02 0514 46 11 13 03 0514 47 11 13 04 0514 48 11 13 05 0514 49 11 13 06 0514 50 11 13 07 0514 51 11 12 40 0514 53 11 11 36 0514 56 11 14 17 0514 57 11 13...

Page 1080: ...909 22 04 0910 22 05 0911 14 07 0912 15 06 0914 14 08 01 14 08 02 14 09 01 14 09 02 14 09 03 0917 22 07 0919 22 08 0921 01 14 01 14 0921 02 25 01 03 0921 03 14 02 11 0921 04 14 01 11 DXE Aspila EX 0921 05 14 02 10 0921 06 14 01 19 14 01 12 0921 07 14 01 17 0921 09 14 02 13 0921 10 14 02 09 0921 12 14 01 15 0921 13 14 01 18 0922 21 15 0924 21 12 0925 12 12 21 03 1001 15 02 15 03 1002 35 04 1003 16 ...

Page 1081: ... 22 12 22 13 1810 01 22 09 02 1810 02 22 11 04 1810 03 22 11 04 1810 04 22 11 07 1810 05 22 11 08 1811 25 10 DXE Aspila EX 1812 25 11 1813 25 12 1814 22 12 22 11 05 1815 22 11 06 1816 01 22 09 04 1816 02 22 09 05 1816 03 22 09 06 1816 04 22 09 07 1816 05 22 09 08 1901 41 02 1902 41 03 01 41 03 02 41 03 03 1903 41 01 01 1904 01 41 04 01 1904 02 41 04 02 1905 41 07 1906 41 05 1907 41 06 1908 01 41 0...

Page 1082: ...1 22 15 01 2214 02 22 15 03 2214 03 2215 05 2214 04 22 15 02 2214 05 22 15 04 2214 06 22 15 06 2301 34 01 01 2302 34 02 2304 34 03 2305 34 05 2306 34 04 2307 34 06 2308 44 02 01 04 2309 44 04 2310 44 03 01 04 2314 44 05 01 06 2315 44 06 2316 44 07 01 04 2404 20 20 01 03 2406 01 20 19 03 2406 02 10 02 02 2406 03 10 02 03 2406 04 10 02 03 10 02 04 2407 02 20 19 01 2407 04 15 02 15 2602 10 03 04 3001...

Page 1083: ...al 1038 28 Group Abbreviated Dial 1075 29 Repeat Dial 1014 30 Saved Number Dial 1015 31 Memo Dial 1017 32 Privacy Release 1018 33 Call Waiting 1019 34 Barge In Break in 1020 35 Camp On Callback 1021 36 Department Step Call 1022 37 DND Call Forward Override 1023 38 Message Waiting 1025 39 Room Monitoring 1026 40 Handset Transmission Cut Off 1031 41 Secretary Buzzer Call 1032 42 Secretary Call Picku...

Page 1084: ...08 Not used 09 Not used 1046 10 ACD Log In Out 1047 11 ACD Conversation Recording 1048 12 ACD Emergency Call 1049 13 ACD Off Duty 1050 14 ACD Operation End Start 1051 15 ACD terminal Speech Monitor 1052 16 ACD Waiting 1053 17 ACD Wrap Up 1095 18 ACD Overflow Control 1079 19 ACD Queue Status Check DXE Aspila EX Description DXE Aspila EX Description ...

Page 1085: ...tem Updates Changed 73 Rest Mode 71 Supervisor ACD Group 71 Supervisor ACD System 71 Traffic Management Reports 71 Work Time 71 ACD MIS inDepth 222 ACI 64 ACI Interface Specifications 66 Auxiliary Device Control 64 Call Recording 65 External Paging 64 Music on Hold 64 Physical Ports and Software Ports 65 Add On Conference 136 Alarm 61 Alarm Sensors External 192 Alphanumeric Display 63 Alternate An...

Page 1086: ... 64 B Background Music 82 Barge In 83 Conference 136 DISA Tie Line 169 Basic Rate Interface BRI 228 Before Reading The Feature Section 3 Behind a PBX 290 BGM 82 Block Camp On 271 Block Manual Off Hook Signals 271 Blocked Call Reporting 332 Blocking Incoming Calls See Do Not Disturb Both Ringing Call Forwarding 87 Both Ways Loop Keys 238 Both Ways Private Line 296 BRI 228 BRI Basic Rate Interface S...

Page 1087: ...oice Mail 379 Caller ID Displays 113 Camp On Trunk Queuing 375 Camp On Call Waiting 108 Camp On DID 159 Cancel Message Waiting 255 Capacities System Number Plan 41 413 Central Office Calls Answering 116 Delayed Ringing 116 Universal Answer 116 Central Office Calls Placing 120 Charts Class of Service Option Administrator Level 125 Class of Service Option Answer Ser vice 128 Class of Service Option ...

Page 1088: ...ta Call 144 Terminal Originated Voice Call Telemarketing Dial 144 Data Privacy 295 Date and Time 347 Date Time and Extension Number Check VAU 393 DCI 144 Keyset Originated Data Call 144 Terminal Originated Data Call 144 Terminal Originated Voice Call Telemarketing Dial 144 DDI Direct Dial In 159 Delayed Ringing Call Coverage Keys 259 Delayed Ringing Outside Calls 116 Delayed Ringing with DILs 165 ...

Page 1089: ...ge Waiting 253 Direct Station Selection One Touch Calling 274 Direct Station Selection DSS Console 174 Direct Trunk Access Placing an Outside Call 123 Tie Line COS 343 Direct Trunk Access with DISA 168 Directed Call Pickup 180 Directory Dialing 182 DISA 168 Common Abbreviated Dialing 168 Department Calling with Overflow Message 169 Direct Trunk Access 168 DISA Class of Service 168 DISA Operating M...

Page 1090: ... Hunting Department Calling 146 Extension Name or Number 333 Extension Names 265 Extension Ring Group 306 Extension Ringdown See Ringdown Extension External Alarm Sensors 192 External Hotline 221 External Meet Me Conference 242 External Meet Me Page 246 External Paging 279 F Fax Machine Compatibility 193 First Digit Absorption 342 Fixed Call Forwarding 90 Flash 195 Flexible Routing VAU 392 Flexibl...

Page 1091: ... SMDR Includes Dialed Number 228 K Key Layout Super Display 45 L Labelmaker 230 Last Number Redial 231 Redial List 231 Line Preference 233 Auto Answer of Non Ringing Lines 233 Incoming Line Preference 233 Outgoing Line Preference 233 Listening in a Group 205 Long Conversation Cutoff 236 Long Conversation Tone 401 Loop Keys 238 M Mailbox Calling Voice Mail 383 Manual Off Hook Signaling 271 Meet Me ...

Page 1092: ...s 55 Orbits Park 286 Outgoing Only Loop Keys 238 Outgoing Only Private Line 296 P Paging Tie Line COS 343 Paging with DISA 168 Paging External 279 Combined Paging 279 Remove Paging Information from Dis play Phones 279 Paging Internal 282 Combined Paging 282 Remove Paging Information from Dis play Phones 282 Paging Meet Me 245 Paging Privacy Release See Conference Voice Call Privacy Release Park 28...

Page 1093: ... 144 S Save Number Dialed 314 Screened Transfer 365 Secretary Call Buzzer 317 Secretary Call Pickup 319 Section 1 Features 3 Selectable Display Messaging 321 Selectable Off Hook Signaling Mode 271 Selectable Ring Tones 324 Serial and Parallel SMDR Communication 333 Serial Call 326 Service Codes One Touch Calling 274 Service Codes by Feature 16 Service Codes by Number 6 Silent Monitor See Barge In ...

Page 1094: ...ility 343 Tie Line Class of Service 342 Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction 343 Tie Line Toll Restriction Class 343 Wink Start Mode Does Not Require a DTMF Receiver 343 Tie DISA Trunk Barge In DISA COS 169 Tie Line COS 343 Time and Date 347 Time Date and Station Number Check 390 393 TMS 358 Toll Call Digit Counting 350 Toll Free Trunks 350 Toll Restriction 349 Call Digit Counting 350 Common Permit ...

Page 1095: ...nal Greeting 390 Time Date and Station Number Check 390 393 Transfer to the VAU Automated Atten dant 390 393 VAU Messages 390 Voice Prompting Messages 390 393 VAU Messages 390 Verified Account Codes 55 Voice Announce Unit 390 900 Preamble 390 393 Automated Attendant Operator Assis tance 390 392 General Message 390 Park and Page 390 391 Personal Greeting 390 Time Date and Station Number Check 390 3...

Page 1096: ...Walking Class of Service See Toll Restriction Override Warning Tone DISA Calls 169 Warning Tone For Long Conversation 401 Warning Tone For Long DISA Conversation 401 Z Zone Paging Combined 279 282 Zone Paging External 279 Zone Paging Internal 282 ...

Page 1097: ......

Page 1098: ...June 2003 NEC Infrontia Asia Pacific Sdn Bhd 24 Jalan Juruhebah U1 50 Temasya Industrial Park Phase 2 Seksyen U1 Glenmarie 40150 Shah Alam Selangor Darul Ehsan Malaysia Tel 603 5569 5888 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for ASPILA EX

Brand: Eclipse Pages: 5

Brand: Eclipse Pages: 21

Brand: Uconnect Pages: 45

magicbox aavelin

Brand: ClearOne Pages: 93

Brand: WesAudio Pages: 65

SwitchPoint Infinity 3

Brand: Stryker Pages: 124

Brand: DIS Pages: 54

HDX Desktop Systems

Brand: Polycom Pages: 2

Brand: RCA Pages: 2

RS2181i/RS2181iF

Brand: RCA Pages: 1

RS2052 - Compact Bookshelf System

Brand: RCA Pages: 20

Brand: RCA Pages: 26

Brand: Kitsound Pages: 10

YUTAKI ATW-YMM-01

Brand: Hitachi Pages: 128

Relion 670 Series

Brand: Hitachi Pages: 192

Brand: Panasonic Pages: 59

Brand: Panasonic Pages: 64

Brand: Panasonic Pages: 80

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands